You are on page 1of 272

M139_UM_ing.

book Page 1 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Owner's Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 2 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Dear Customer,
thank you for choosing a MASERATI.
This vehicle represents the result of MASERATI's great experience in the design and construction of sports, touring and
racing vehicles.
The purpose of this manual is to provide you with an understanding of the equipment, systems and controls in the vehicle
and to explain how they work.
In the final section of this manual you will also find instructions for basic maintenance procedures and the complete
Maintenance Schedule, which are needed to ensure steady levels of performance, quality and safe driving.
In addition, keep in mind that proper maintenance is an essential factor to help preserve the value of the vehicle over time
and protect the environment.
For Scheduled Maintenance or any other operation, please contact the Maserati Service Network: you can trust our trained
technical staff, who are constantly updated and provided with the equipment required to ensure that all service operations
are performed properly and reliably.
For improved safety, we recommend that you to read this manual carefully before driving the vehicle.
The Owner's Manual is an integral part of the vehicle and it must always be kept on board

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 3 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 4 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Historical info 1934 1961


Giuseppe Furmanik in a Type 4CM: The 3500 GT is the first Italian vehicle
1914 World landspeed record in the class to adopt fuel injection.
The Alfieri Maserati garage is founded 1100 at 222 kph.
in Bologna.
1963
1939 Production begins of the Mistral and
1926 Wilbur Shaw on a 8CTF wins the the Quattroporte, the fastest saloon
Targa Florio, Type 26: debut and Indianapolis 500 Miles: Maserati is to car in the world.
victory of a vehicle sporting the Trident remain the first and only Italian
symbol on front lid, inspired by the manufacturer to win on the legendary 1966
statue of Neptune in Bologna. Indy motor speedway. The Ghibli is presented, a coupé
designed by Giugiaro.
1927 1940
Emilio Maserati becomes the outright The company moves headquarters to 1968
Italian champion with the Type 26. Modena. The Citrôen becomes a partner in the
company and the V6 engine goes into
1929 1947 production.
Baconin Borzacchini in the Type V4: The first Granturismo is built: the A6 The 2+2 Indy is presented.
World landspeed record over 10 km at 1500 with bodywork by Pininfarina.
246 kph. The A6GCS racing version debuts 1971
victoriously with Alberto Ascari on the The Bora is presented, the first
1930 Modena circuit. Maserati Granturismo with a central
Borzacchini in the Type V4: first Grand engine.
Prix victory in Tripoli. 1954 Followed a year later by the Merak.
The 250F, the single-seater which will
1933 allow the Maserati to win the Formula 1973
Maserati, the most prestigious 1 World Championships, makes its first The Khamsin, designed by Bertone,
European manufacturer introduces the appearance winning in Argentina. replaces the Ghibli.
hydraulic brake control in its racing
vehicles. Giuseppe Campari in a Type 1957 1975
8CM wins the French Grand Prix and Fangio in the 250F wins the world title. Citrôen leaves the company, which is
Tazio Nuvolari those in Belgium and At the end of the season, Maserati then bought out by Alejandro De
Nice. officially withdraws from racing. Tomaso.

4 Historical info

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 5 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

1976 2000 2007


The new Quattroporte is presented, Alfieri Maserati Garage Customisation The Granturismo, Coupè 2+2 comes to
designed by Giugiaro, Programme. life.
which will go on to be used as the
official car of the President of the 2001
Italian Republic. Production begins of the Spyder with
eight-cylinder engine, 4200 and the
1981 electro-hydraulic steering-wheel
De Tomaso changes marketing mounted gearbox "Cambiocorsa".
strategy and starts production of the Alfieri Maserati garages.
Biturbo, a two-door saloon with a six-
cylinder engine. 2002
The 2+2 Coupè is presented.
1989
The Shamal is the first vehicle to adopt 2003
the new biturbo eight-cylinder engine. A return to racing with the TROFEO.
The Quattroporte designed by
1993 Pininfarina is presented, also used as
Fiat Auto buys out the entire Maserati presidential car by the President of the
share package and in 1998 presents Italian Republic.
the Quattroporte.
2004
1997 The MC12 with 630 HP 12-cylinder
Ferrari acquires the majority of engine is born.
Maserati shareholding.
2005
1998 Maserati wins the FIA GT
Quattroporte Evoluzione V8 3.2 - V6 championship with the MC12.
2.8.
3200 GT V8. 2006
The Quattroporte with automatic
1999 gearbox is presented.
3200 GT V8 Automatica.

Historical info 5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 6 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Quattroporte 1963

Quattroporte 1976

Quattroporte 1965

6 Historical info

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 7 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Introduction Abbreviations Updating


Some descriptions and terms with The vehicle's high quality level is
Consulting the Manual particular meanings are found in this guaranteed by constant
manual in an abbreviated form: improvements. Therefore, there may
To facilitate reading and rapid use, the
A.C. - AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM prove to be differences between this
topics are sub-divided into SECTIONS
manual and your vehicle.
and CHAPTERS. ABS - ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM -
All specifications and illustrations
The important parts requiring Wheel locking prevention
contained in this manual refer to those
particular attention are easily system during braking
resulting as of the printing date.
identifiable in the sections and ALC - ADAPTIVE LIGHT CONTROL -
chapters: Automatic headlight aiming
system
EXTREME CAUTION ASR - ANTI-SLIP REGULATION -
REQUIRED: failure to comply Prevention of skidding during
with the instructions could acceleration
cause hazardous situations involving
personal and vehicle safety! CAN - CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK
DRL - DAY RUNNING LIGHTS
WARNING: aimed at preventing any EBD - ELECTRONIC BRAKE-FORCE
damage to the vehicle and thus DISTRIBUTION - Electronically
hazards involving the safety of controlled distributor of
persons. braking force
ECU - ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT
EPB - ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
ETD - EMERGENCY TENSIONING
DEVICE
MSP - MASERATI STABILITY
PROGRAM Yaw prevention
monitoring system
TPMS - TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM.

Introduction 7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 8 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Service Automatic gearbox Multi Media System


The information contained in this The vehicle is equipped with an The vehicle is equipped with the
manual is limited to those instructions electronically-controlled automatic infotelematics Maserati Multi Media
and indications that are strictly gearbox system which, in addition to System which provides the following
required for the use and good the normal automatic gearshift standard features:
preservation of the vehicle. functions, allows the user to shift gears – on-board computer;
The Owner will certainly obtain in sequence and manually, once the
– satellite navigation system (where
greater satisfaction and the best specific mode has been selected.
digital maps are available);
results from the vehicle by following For correct user of the gearbox system,
these instructions carefully. follow the instructions given in the – Bose® Sound System;
We also advise you to have all the specific chapter of this manual. – single CD/MP3 reader;
maintenance services and inspections – 30 gb Hard Disk
carried out at Maserati Service On request, these features can further
Network Centres, where you will find be enriched with the addition of a
specialized staff and suitable GSM telephone (where the relative
equipment. standard is available), Bluetooth®
See the "SALES AND SERVICE function, AUX port and USB port.
ORGANIZATION" manual for locations
of AUTHORISED MASERATI DEALERS
AND SERVICE CENTRES.
The Maserati Service Network is at
your complete disposal for any
information and suggestions.

8 Introduction

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 9 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

“Run Flat” tyres After 120 km (75 mi), the warning not Towing the vehicle
(optional) to continue will be displayed. The vehicle has not been designed,
The vehicle can be fitted with “Run For further information on the display, developed and homologated to be
Flat” tyres. This kind of tyre is please refer to chapter: “Tyre pressure used as a towing vehicle for other
equipped with reinforced sidewalls monitoring system” on page 47. means (e.g. trailers, caravans, etc.) and
which permit the vehicle to continue nothing can be loaded on the roof;
travelling at a moderate speed WARNING: Always comply with the
fitting structures such as bars or roof-
80 km/h - 50 mph), even in the event of specified wheel alignment values, as
racks may damage the vehicle.
a puncture, for a set distance. this is fundamental to obtain the best
performance from and the longest life
When the control panel receives the
of your tyres.
“punctured tyre” information from
the tyre pressure ECU, it monitors the
residual tyre life by showing a warning
signal in the relevant area on the
display at the following intervals: after
50 km and 100 km (31 mi and 62 mi).

Standard Run flat

0 psi - 0 bar

0 psi - 0 bar

Introduction 9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 10 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Symbols Danger symbols Symbols of prohibitions


Battery Battery
There are specific coloured plates on or Corrosive liquid. Do not approach with naked
near some of the components on your flames.
MASERATI. The related symbols are
important warnings that the user must Battery Battery
follow when using the component at Explosion Keep children at a safe
involved. distance.
All of the symbols included in the
labelling on your MASERATI are listed Fan Heat guards - belts - pulleys
concisely here below, along with the It can start up automatically - fans
component involved with that symbol. even with the engine stopped. Do not rest your hands on
In addition, the meaning of the symbol these parts.
shown is also indicated in terms of the Expansion tank
following sub-division: danger, Do not remove the cap when Engine compartment ECU
the coolant is hot. protection cover
prohibition, warning, compulsory -
Do not direct the jet of water
with respect to that same symbol.
Coil on the ECUs, relays and fuses.
High voltage.

Belts and pulleys


Moving devices: keep body
parts and clothing away.

Air-conditioning lines
Do not open. Gas under high
pressure.

10 Symbols

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 11 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Warning symbols Windscreen wipers Symbols indicating compulsory


Only use fluid of the type measures
Catalytic muffler prescribed in the section
Do not park or stop over “Capacities and technical Battery
flammable surfaces. Refer to specifications”. Protect your eyes.
chapter: “Air Quality devices”.
Engine
Hydraulic steering Use only the lubricant Battery - Jack
Do not exceed the maximum recommended in the section Refer to the Owner's Manual.
level of fluid in the tank. Only “Capacities and Technical
use fluid of the type specifications”.
prescribed in then section
“Capacities and technical Vehicle using lead-free
specifications”. gasoline
Only use lead-free gasoline
Brake circuit with an octane number
Do not exceed the maximum (R.O.N.) of no less than 95.
level of fluid in the tank. Only
use fluid of the type Expansion tank
prescribed in the section Only use fluid of the type
“Capacities and technical prescribed in the section
specifications”. “Capacities and technical
specifications”.

Symbols 11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap1_FOTO_ing.fm Page 12 Friday, May 30, 2008 2:12 PM

12

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap1_FOTO_ing.fm Page 13 Friday, May 30, 2008 2:12 PM

Contents

Vehicle identification data 1

Active and passive safety 2

Instruments and controls 3

Before you drive 4

Using the vehicle 5

In an emergency 6

Capacities and technical specifications 7

Maintenance 8

Table of contents 9

13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap1_FOTO_ing.fm Page 14 Friday, May 30, 2008 2:12 PM

14

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap1_FOTO_ing.fm Page 15 Friday, May 30, 2008 2:12 PM

Vehicle identification data

Identification plates 16
1
Vehicle identification plate 17
Key codes 18

15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 16 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Identification plates Engine marking Paint identification plate


The engine A serial number is punched The plate B is applied onto the engine
Chassis marking on the lower part of the crankcase, in compartment lid.
the starter motor area.
The vehicle's registration number is
The engine type is indicated on the
1 punched on the underfloor, in front of
plate positioned on the front, left-
the right-hand front seat.
hand door's ledge.
To read the number, lift the mat and
remove the guard.

A
B

16 Identification plates

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 17 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Vehicle identification F - Maximum admissible weight on


second (rear) axle
plate G - Engine type
H - Vehicle version code
The plate is fitted on the front left-
L - Assembly Number.
hand door's ledge and it shows the 1
following details:
A - Manufacturer's name
B - Homologation number
C - Serial Number (V.I.N.)
D - Maximum admissible weight
E - Maximum admissible weight on
first (front) axle

A
D
E
F
B
C
H G L

Vehicle identification plate 17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 18 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Key codes WARNING: The code numbers shown WARNING: In the event of a vehicle
on the CODE CARD should be kept in a ownership transfer, it is essential that
safe place. the new owner is provided with all the
A CODE CARD is supplied with the
keys and with the CODE CARD.
keys. This card indicates the following: WARNING: You are advised to always
– the electronic code A to be used in
1 the procedure for “emergency
keep the CODE CARD number with WARNING: It is advisable to write
you, as this is absolutely necessary in down and keep the codes listed on the
starts” the event of an “emergency start”. plates delivered with the keys and the
– the mechanical key code B to be remote control in a safe place (not in
given to the Maserati Service the car) in order to request duplicates
Network when ordering duplicate if needed.
keys.

A
B

18 Key codes

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 19 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Key codes 19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap2_FOTO_ing.fm Page 20 Friday, May 30, 2008 2:14 PM

20

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap2_FOTO_ing.fm Page 21 Friday, May 30, 2008 2:14 PM

Active and passive safety

Seat belts 22
Safe transport of children 27
Front and side airbags 36
2
MSP System 43
ASR system (electronic anti-skid device) 44
ABS and EBD systems 45
Tyre pressure monitoring system (optional) 47
Parking sensors 54
Fuel cut-out inertia switch 58

21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 22 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Seat belts Fastening the seat belts The retractor locking device is
Extract the lower section of the seat activated whenever the belt is pulled
belt from the outer side of the seat and out too rapidly or in case of sudden
The vehicle is equipped with seat belts
secure it by holding the fastening tang braking or collision.
with automatic retractor for maximum
A, and pulling out the belt until the If the belt locks due to too rapid
freedom of movement.
tang inserts into the buckle lock B. extraction, allow it to retract a short
The seat belts are equipped with
The belt is correctly engaged when the distance to disengage the locking
electronically-controlled load limiting
lock clicks into position. To release the device.
devices and pretensioners. In addition,
2 the attachment points of all the seat belts, press button C. The retractor allows the belt to
The vehicle is equipped with an SBR automatically fit to the passenger’s
belts are directly linked to the seat, in
(Seat Belt Reminder) system, which body, allowing him/her to move freely.
order to ensure optimal protection,
warns the driver when the seat belt is When the vehicle is parked on a steep
whatever the seat position.
not fastened by sounding an acoustic slope, the retractor may lock: this is
All the seat belts, excluding the driver's
warning at the same time turning on normal.
seat and the rear central seat, are
equipped with KISI system. the warning light on the instrument
WARNING: Feed the belt back into the
The KISI system uses special seat belt panel .
retractor by hand to avoid twisting and
retractors that, when they are fully
snagging.
unwound, they only allow the seat
belts to be rewound. This system
allows the child seat to be properly
anchored to the seat. The system
deactivates after unfastening the seat
belt, and allows it to be fully retracted
to its original rest position.

A
B

22 Seat belts

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 23 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Adjusting the front seat belts To move the attachment fitting, press Using the rear seat belts
height (front seats only) control D. The belts for the rear seats must be
worn as shown in the figure.
The seat belts height must be After the adjustment, always
adjusted with the vehicle check that the cursor to which
Remember that, in the event
stationary. the oscillating ring is fixed, is
of a violent impact, the
locked into one of the positions
passengers on the rear seats
Always adjust the height of the front provided. Therefore, with the
that are not wearing the seat belts are
seat belts so that they suit the driver's handgrip released, push again 2
not only subject to personal injuries
and passenger's height. This downwards to allow the anchoring
but they also represent a danger for
precaution can reduce the risk of injury device to click into place, in the event
passengers sitting in the front seats.
in a collision substantially. that it has not been released in one of
The correct adjustment is achieved the positions provided.
The seat belts must be worn keeping
when the belt passes about mid-way
your chest in the upright position and
between the end of the shoulder and
lying against the backrest.
the neck.
When the rear seats are not occupied,
The upper attachment point of the
place the seat belt buckles in their
seat belts is equipped with an
respective seatings.
oscillating ring capable of moving into
4 different positions, allowing the
belts position to be adjusted.

Seat belts 23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 24 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Load limiting devices The pretensioners activate in the The pretensioners can be used
following cases: only once and activate only
To increase passive safety levels, the
– Head-on and rear collisions of a when the seat belts are
seat belt retractors are equipped with
sufficient severity; fastened. After activation, contact the
a load limiting device which makes it
Maserati Service Network to have the
possible to control the belt reeling – In certain roll-overs.
pretensioners replaced and for
out, so that the force exerted on the The pretensioner only activates when properly discarding the old
shoulders while the seat belt is in the seat belt is fastened. components. The units have a 14 year
restraining mode can be suitably After the pretensioner activation, the
2 adjusted. seat belt can be unfastened as usual,
service life from the date of
manufacture; they must be replaced
by pressing the button on the buckle. when their service life is near to
Pretensioners The pretensioner does not require any expiry.
To further enhance the seat belt maintenance or lubrication.
efficiency, the vehicle seat belts (except Tampering with the device will WARNING: Work on the vehicle which
for the rear central one) are equipped compromise its efficient operation. If, involves blows, vibrations or localized
with ETD (Emergency Tensioning as a result of exceptional natural heating (over 100°C / 212°F for 6 hours
Device) pretensioners. circumstances (floods, heavy seas, etc.), max.) in the area of the pretensioners
These devices "detect", by means of a the device has been in contact with may damage or activate them:
sensor, that the vehicle is in a collision water and sludge, it is absolutely vibrations due to uneven road surfaces
and retract the belts by a few essential to replace it. or mounting the pavement
centimetres. This ensures that the belt To ensure the best protection from the unintentionally, for instance, do not
perfectly adheres to the occupants’ pretensioner, secure the belt snugly affect the units. Contact the Maserati
bodies before starting its restraining across your chest and pelvis. Service Network for any intervention
action. that may be required.
The belt locking indicates that the
device has been activated; a small It is strictly forbidden to
amount of smoke may be visible. remove or tamper with the
The smoke is not toxic and is not pretensioner components.
indicative of fire. Any intervention must be carried out
only by qualified and authorized
personnel. Always contact the
Maserati Service Network.

24 Seat belts

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 25 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

General warnings for using the injuries in an accident. What is more, vehicle rolls over, or in the event of
seat belts in an accident, the lower section of the rear bumps or minor frontal collisions.
belt could press against the upper part
It is compulsory for the driver of your stomach rather than the pelvic When travelling with one or
and passengers to make area, causing serious internal injuries. more child seats fitted on the
appropriate use of the rear seat of the vehicle, the
restraint systems fitted in the vehicle. Always fasten the seat belts. tables must be in the closed position.
Travelling without the seat
To guarantee maximum belts fastened increases the The passenger seated in the 2
protection, you are advised to risk of serious injury in the event of a rear, when the vehicle is
keep the seatback in the most collision, even with the airbags. In the moving and the table/s is/are
upright position possible and the seat event of a collision, the seat belts open must wear a seatbelt. Travelling
belt close to your chest and pelvis. If reduce the possibility of the vehicle's without the seatbelt fastened
the seat belt is loose, in the event of occupants being thrown against the increases the risk of injury in the event
an accident you would be moved too structures of the passenger of a collision .
far forward and could be injured. compartment or out of the vehicle.
Travelling with the seatback too far The airbags are designed to work
reclined could be dangerous: even if together with the seat belts, not to
the seat belts are fastened, they may substitute them. The front airbags
not work correctly. In fact, the belt only intervene in the event of head-on
itself may not be close enough to your collisions of medium or high intensity.
body and, if it is in front of you, it They will not be activated if the
could cause neck wounds or other

Seat belts 25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 26 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Do not fasten your seat belt Do not carry children on a below the abdominal region of the
using the buckle lock for the passenger’s lap using only one body.
other seat: in the event of an seat belt for protecting both
accident, the lower section of the belt of them. How to keep seat belts efficient
could press against the upper part of
1) Always use the seat belts keeping
your stomach rather than the pelvic If the seat belt has been
the belt perfectly flat, not twisted;
area, causing serious internal injuries. suffered a heavy mechanical
make sure the belt can slide freely,
stress, for example during a
without jamming.
2 It is extremely dangerous to collision, it must be completely
2) The seat belts must be replaced
travel with the belt positioned replaced together with its anchorages,
underneath your arm. In the the screws fastening the said following every pretensioner
event of an accident, you would be anchorages and the pretensioner. In activation and whenever the belt itself
thrown forward and would very fact, even if there are no visible shows visible damages or abrasions.
probably suffer head and neck defects, the resistance level offered by 3) Wash the seat belts by hand using
injuries. What is more, if the belt the seat belt could be reduced. water and neutral soap, rinse them
presses against your ribs, it could and let them dry in the shade. Do not
cause serious internal injuries. Pregnant women must use strong detergents, bleaches or
scrupulously observe local colourants and any other chemical
The belt must not be twisted; legislation regarding the use substance that could weaken the belt
make sure that it is snugly of seat belts. Make sure, in any case, fibres.
fitted to the driver's and that the lower section of the belt is 4) Make sure the retractors do not get
passenger's bodies. In fact, in an positioned well down on the hips, wet: they will operate properly only if
accident, the restraining force would they do not suffer water infiltrations.
not be distributed evenly along the
belt and would consequently cause
injuries. The upper part of the belt
must pass over the shoulder and
diagonally across the chest. The lower
section must adhere to your pelvis, not
the stomach, to avoid that you slide
forward in the event of a collision. Do
not use devices (clips, fastenings etc.)
that prevent the seat belts from laying
close to the passengers' bodies.

26 Seat belts

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 27 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Safe transport of children Where provided for by law (in Children must never travel
the European Community), seated on a passenger’s lap. In
children under 3 years of age a collision, a child becomes so
For optimal protection in the event of
cannot travel in the vehicle unless heavy that it is impossible to hold onto
a collision, all the occupants in the using a suitable restraint system. him or her. For example, in the event
vehicle must travel seated and of a collision at only 40 km/h, a child
protected by appropriate restraining Where provided for by law (in weighing 5.5 kg exerts a force equal to
systems. The seat belts have been the European Community), 110 kg on the arms of the person
designed to be used by persons whose
physical characteristics (i.e. age,
children under 3 years of age carrying him/her. Children must 2
who are less than 150 cm tall may not always be protected by a suitable
height, weight) fall within the limits travel on the front seat unless using a restraining system when travelling.
provided for by established legislation suitable restraint system.
in each country (for the European Children who are resting on
Community: 150 cm in height and 3- Children must always use a the airbag or are too close to it
years of age minimum). Anyone who suitable restraint system when it is activated, may be
does not comply with these provisions when travelling, preferably seriously injured. The airbags and
may not travel in the passenger seat. fitted on the rear seat as this is the pretensioners provide suitable
This also applies to children. Their safest position in the event of a protection for adults and teenagers,
heads are proportionally heavier and collision. but not for children and babies.
larger than those of adults, while their Neither the seat belts or the airbags
bones and muscles are relatively When travelling with one or are designed for them. Children and
undeveloped. To protect them in the more child seats fitted on the babies must travel in suitable
case of a collision, they must use rear seat of the vehicle, the restraining systems.
special restraint or safety systems. tables must be closed.

No child seat can be installed


in the rear, central seat.

Safe transport of children 27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 28 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Babies must be supported whom the seat belts are designed for. The KISI system uses special seat belt
completely, including their A child’s hips are so small that the seat retractors that, when they are fully
head and neck. This is belt will not stay in the correct unwound, they only allow the seat
necessary since a baby’s neck is weak position on them. The belt may rise up belts to be rewound. This system
while their head is proportionally on the child’s stomach and, in the allows the child seat to be properly
bigger and heavier in relation to their event of a collision, cause serious anchored to the seat. The system
body. In a collision, if a baby is internal injuries. Children must always deactivates after unfastening the seat
travelling in a rearward-facing child be protected by suitable restraining belt, and allows it to be fully retracted
2 seat, the impact forces are distributed systems. to its original rest position.
through the more solid parts of the
body, i.e. the back and shoulders. If a child seat is installed on To ensure an optimal
Babies must always be protected by a the front passenger’s seat, this restraining action of the child
suitable restraining system when must be positioned fully back seats, we recommend that
travelling. and up. This is essential to help ensure you choose the model that best suits
maximum safety for the child. the shape of your seats. It is advisable
Children cannot be carried to try fitting the child seat in your
using a rearward-facing child All minors whose physical vehicle before purchasing itand to not
seat fitted on a passenger seat characteristics (age, height, weight) install child seats that, when placed on
protected by a front airbag, unless the meet the limit values provided by the the seat, have an unstable or
said airbag is deactivated. established legislation in each country unnatural position due to the shape of
must be protected by special restraint your vehicle seat.
Deactivate the airbag before or safety systems (certified child seats,
fitting a rearward-facing child cradles, cushions).
seat on the front passenger Make sure that you always use
seat. homologated universal child restraint
systems.
If a child seat is installed on For installation and use of the child
the front passenger’s seat, the restraint systems, carefully follow the
seat must be positioned fully instructions that the Manufacturer of
upright. these devices is obliged to provide.
All the seat belts, excluding the driver’s
The structure of a child body is seat and the rear central seat, are
completely different from that equipped with KISI system.
of an adult or a teenager,

28 Safe transport of children

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 29 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

To fasten a child seat, follow Never modify or tamper with The European Community regulations
the installation instructions the seat belts and the child that govern the transport of children
provided by the child seat restraining systems. are found in directive 2003/20/EC.
Manufacturer. Position all the movable Established legislation in some This directive divides restraint systems
parts of the child seats (e.g., handle, countries already provides that into five groups:
reclining seatback, sunshade etc.) children under 12 years of age may not Group 0 0-10 kg weight
carefully following the instructions travel in the front passenger seat.
provided by the Manufacturer and Group 0 + up to 13kg weight
found on the instructions manual of Rearward-facing child seats Group 1 9-18 kg weight 2
the same child seat. Then fully unwind must not be used on front Group 2 15-25 kg weight
the seat belt and let it rewind. During passenger seats equipped
Group 3 22-36 kg weight
rewinding, you will hear a click sound: with active passenger’s airbag, as this
this means that the KISI system has could cause serious injuries during As can be seen, the groups partially
activated and that the seat belt is now deployment, independently of the overlap and commercially available
locked. Then push the child seat impact severity. Rearward-facing child equipment may cover more than one
against the seat to rewind any excess seats may be used on the front weight group.
length of the seat belt. To deactivate passenger seat only in European All the restraining devices must bear
the retractor, unbuckle the seat belt vehicle models, that are equipped the approval data, together with the
and let it rewind completely. The seat with passenger’s airbag deactivation check mark on a plate - which must
belt can now be used normally. switch. In this case, the driver must never be removed - fixed soundly to
make sure that the airbag is the device,
Never unbuckle the seat belt deactivated by checking the relative Children over 36 kg in weight and 1.50
that retains the child seat warning light on the instrument m in height, for the purposes of
when the vehicle is moving. panel. We recommend that you restraint systems, are considered
always carry children in their specific equivalent to adults and can wear the
In the event of an accident, an child seats positioned on the vehicle seat belts in the normal way.
incorrectly fastened child rear seats, as this is the safest place in
restraining system increases the event of a collision.
the risk of injury.

Safe transport of children 29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 30 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Groups 0 and 0+ Group 1 Certain child seats meet the


requirements for groups 0 and
Babies weighing up to 13 kg must be Children weighing 9 kg and more may
1 with a rear fixing point for
transported in a rearward-facing baby travel in a forward-facing child seat
the seat belt and integrated harness
seat, which provides head support and equipped with a front cushion,
for child restraint. Due to their
thereby avoids neck strain in the case through which the vehicle seat belt
weight, they may be hazardous if
of sudden decelerations. secures both the child seat and the
incorrectly secured to the vehicle seat
The baby seat is secured by the vehicle child.
belts with a cushion. Strictly follow
seat belts as shown in the figure, and
2 must restrain the child with its own The figures are purely
the instructions provided with the
product.
incorporated belts. illustrative. Secure the child
seat according to the
Deactivate the airbag before instructions provided with the
fitting a rearward-facing child product.
seat on the front passenger
seat.

The figures are purely


illustrative. Secure the child
seat according to the
instructions provided with the
product.

30 Safe transport of children

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 31 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Group 2 Group 3
Children weighing 22 kg and more
Children weighing over 15 kg must be
only need a cushion to raise their
secured directly by the vehicle seat
position. The depth of the child’s chest
belt. Child seats have the additional
is sufficient to make a distancing
purpose of positioning the child
backrest unnecessary.
correctly with respect to the seat belts,
Children over 1.50 m in height can use
in such a way that the diagonal portion
seat belts like adults.
of the seat belt closely adheres to the 2
child’s chest and never to the neck, and
The figures are purely
the lap portion adheres to the pelvis
illustrative. Secure the child
and not to the abdominal region.
seat according to the
instructions provided with the
The figures are purely
product.
illustrative. Secure the child
seat according to the
instructions provided with the
product.

Safe transport of children 31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 32 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Suitability of the passenger seats for using child seats If the vehicle is equipped with active
The vehicle complies with the new European Directive 200/3/CE that governs the passenger airbags, children may not
installation of child seats on the different vehicle seats, according to the travel on the front seat in a rearward-
following table: facing child seat.
When deactivating the passenger-side
airbag, always check that the relative
Weight warning light on the instrument
Group Front Rear side
groups Rear central panel and the LED A on the roof panel
passenger passenger
passenger
2 . are illuminated, as this indicates that
the airbag has been deactivated.
Groups 0, 0+ up to 13 kg U( ) U * Always and strictly follow the
instructions which the manufacturer is
Group 1 9-18 kg U( ) U * obliged by law to enclose with the
Group 2 15-25 kg U( ) U * seat.
Keep the instructions in the vehicle
Group 3 22-36 kg U( ) U * together with the documents and this
handbook. Do not use a seat which
Legend Below is a summary of the safety does not have any instructions for use.
U= suitable for "Universal" restraint regulations to be followed for
systems as provided for by the transporting children:
European Regulation EEC-R44 Children whose age, weight and
pertaining to the indicated height are below the minimum limits
"Groups". established by the laws in force in the
individual countries (European
( ) When fitting the system in the Community: 3 years, 36 kg and 150 cm) A
vehicle, the seat back must be in may only travel if secured using
a fully upright position. suitable restraint systems. We
recommend that you always fit any
* NO child seat, of any kind, may restraint system on the rear seat, as this
be installed on the rear central is the safest position in the event of a
seat. collision.

32 Safe transport of children

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 33 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

WARNING: We recommend that you Isofix seats The rear seats can be fitted with two
choose the seat that best suits the standard seats or two Isofix seats max.
The rear side seats of the vehicle are
shape of your vehicle’s seat and that Only standard type child seats can be
equipped with anchoring points for
you try to install the seat before mounted on the front passenger seat.
Isofix child seats. This is a new system
purchasing it. Deactivate the airbag before fitting a
complying with European standards
for carrying children. rearward-facing child seat on the front
Always pull the seat belt to check that passenger seat. In addition, the front
This system provides a special
it is locked in place. passenger seat must be positioned
anchoring system for child seats, which
All restraint system is for use by a
uses two metal brackets B positioned fully back and the backrest must be in 2
single passenger only: never carry two the fully upright position.
between the seat cushion and
children in the same seat. The Isofix system covers three weight
backrest.
Always check that the seat belts are groups: 0. 0+ and 1.
These metal brackets are easily
not resting against the child’s neck.
identifiable through the label
Do not allow the child to sit in Fit the child seat only when
bearing the logo shown
improper positions or to unbuckle the the vehicle is stationary. The
below.
seat belt /child seat safety harness child seat is correctly anchored
The seats designed for Isofix child seats
while travelling. to the brackets when a click indicates
installation can always be fitted with
Do not carry children in your arms, it is locked in place. Follow the
standard child seats:
including babies. Nobody, however mounting, removal and positioning
you can actually install a standard and
strong, can hold on to a child in the instructions provided by the child seat
an Isofix child seat at the same time.
event of a collision. manufacturer.
After an accident, always replace the
child seat with a new one.

Safe transport of children 33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 34 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Isofix position IUF = Isofix position suitable for


forward-facing Isofix type child
Side
Size Front Side restraint systems of the universal
Earth unit Envelope rear, Other
class passenger rear, left- class, approved for use in the
right positions
seat hand relative weight group.
hand
F ISO / L1 X X
Carry X= Isofix position not suitable for
G ISO / L2 X X Isofix child restraint systems in
cot
2 (1) this weight group and/or in this
E ISO / R1 IUF IUF size class.
Group 0 +
(1)
up to 10kg

E ISO / R1 IUF IUF


Group 0+ D ISO / R2 IUF IUF
up to 13 kg C ISO / R3 IUF IUF
(1)
D ISO / R2 IUF IUF
C ISO / R3 IUF IUF
Group I
B ISO / F2 IUF IUF
from 9 to
B1 ISO / F2X IUF IUF
18 kg
A ISO / F3 IUF IUF
(1)

34 Safe transport of children

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 35 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Fitting child vehicle seats for Fitting child seats type 1 – align the anchoring points E with the
groups 0 and 0+ For carrying children whose weight brackets C, then push the seat until
To carry children whose weight falls in falls in group 1, the child seat must be you hear it click in place, which
the 0 and 0+ groups, the child seat installed facing forward. indicates it is properly secured
must be installed facing rearward. For installation, proceed as follows: – check that the child seat is correctly
Carefully check that the brackets C are – make sure that the release lever D is locked by trying to move it with
properly installed in their seatings E. in the permanent position strength; the incorporated safety
The child is then secured by the child (retracted); mechanisms prevent the child seat
seat harness F. from being improperly fitted if only 2
one of the attachment fittings is
locked.
– pass the strap G underneath the rear
G headrest, and anchor it onto the
child seat backrest and onto the
bracket on the car body.
F
This way, the child seat is restrained
not only by the brackets C but also by
the vehicle seat belt and by the upper
strap G.
Always refer to the instruction manual
provided with the child seat for fitting
E the vehicle seat belts to the said child
seat correctly.
D

C
E

E C

D
Safe transport of children 35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 36 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Front and side airbags

18
7
2 4
5

6 8
2
3
17

9
11

10
14
15

16
1 12 13

36 Front and side airbags

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 37 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

The vehicle is equipped with 6 airbags 15) Clock Spring The airbag deploys almost
(2 front and 4 lateral ones) and 16) Diagnostic socket instantaneously, placing itself between
electronically-operated pretensioners the front passengers and potentially
17) Left-hand rear pretensioner
for all of the seat belts except the rear harmful parts of the vehicle. The
central one. 18) Right-hand rear pretensioner. airbags deflate immediately
The system components are the afterwards.
following: Front airbags
1) Electronic control unit The front airbags (driver’s and In the event of a collision, any
2) Passenger’s front airbag
passenger’s) are safety devices which occupants not wearing their 2
activate in the event of a head-on seat belt will be thrown
3) Passenger’s airbag deactivation collision. forward and will come into contact
switch (where available) They consist of an instantaneously with the airbag before it is fully
4) Passenger’s front seat belt inflating airbag contained in a special inflated. n) can be engaged. the event
pretensioner housing: of a collision, any occupants not
wearing their seat belt will be thrown
5) Passenger’s lateral airbag (side bag) – in the centre of the steering wheel
forward and will come into contact
6) Passenger-side satellite crash sensor on the driver side;
with the airbag before it is fully
7) Passenger-side window bag – in the dashboard and with a larger inflated. nn) can be engaged. The
size bag (full size airbag) on the front airbags (driver’s and passenger’s)
8) Driver-side window bag
passenger side. are not a substitute for the seat belts
9) Driver’s lateral airbag (side bag) The front airbags (driver’s and but rather act in combination with
10) Driver-side satellite crash sensor passenger’s) are safety devices them. As a consequence, the seat belts
11) Driver’s front seat belt designed to protect the occupants in must always be worn as provided for
pretensioner the event of head-on collisions of by applicable legislation in Europe and
medium-high severity. They act by in most non-European countries.
12) Airbag system failure warning light
placing a cushion (airbag) between the
13) Passenger’s airbag off warning occupant and the steering wheel or
light the dashboard.
14) Driver’s front airbag In the event of a collision, an ECU
processes the deceleration signals
detected by the MSP system and
activates, when necessary, airbag
deployment.

Front and side airbags 37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 38 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

To allow the front airbags to Therefore, in these cases, failure of the law, we recommend for the safety of
deploy correctly and with airbag to deploy is not an indication of adult passengers, that the airbag be
optimal efficiency, both the a system malfunction. immediately reactivated as soon as the
driver and the front passenger must seat is no longer used for carrying
maintain a distance of at least 25 cm Passenger’s airbag children.
from the steering wheel and the (full size airbag)
dashboard. The passenger’s airbag has been SERIOUS DANGER. Do not
designed and calibrated to enhance position any objects on the
2 Remember that, in the event the protection level provided to a upper part of the dashboard.
of a violent impact, the person wearing the seat belt. In the event of airbag deployment
passengers travelling in the Therefore, when fully deployed, it fills following a collision, these objects
rear seats that are not wearing the may affect correct opening of the
the largest part of the space between
seat belts are not only subject to airbag cover, causing the restraint
the passenger and the dashboard.
personal injuries but they also system not to function properly, or
represent a danger for passengers they may be projected into the
SERIOUS DANGER: the
sitting in the front seats. passenger compartment as a
vehicle is fitted with a
consequence of a sudden opening of
passenger side airbag.
Never remove the steering the cover, which may seriously injure
Before fitting any rearward-facing
wheel. If necessary, this the occupants.
child seat on the front passenger
operation should only be
seat,if the vehicle is equipped with the
performed by a Maserati Service
specific deactivation switch, always
Network centre.
deactivate the front passenger’s
airbag. Even where not required by
In the case of low-severity head on
collisions (in which the restraining
action of the seat belts provides
m
adequate protection), the airbags will 25 c
not be activated.
The airbags do not activate in the
event of rear and side collisions, as
they do not provide any
supplementary protection.

38 Front and side airbags

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 39 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Passenger’s Airbag manual The key switch has two positions: We recommend that you
deactivation switch (where 1) passenger airbag activated: always fit any child seats on
available) (position ON ) the warning light on the rear seat, as this is the
If you have to carry a child on the front the instrument panel and the LED on safest position in the event of a
passenger seat, always deactivate the the roof panel are off; it is prohibited collision.
airbag on the passenger’s side before to carry children on the passenger seat.
installing a rearward-facing child seat. No child seat can be installed
2) passenger airbag deactivated:
in the rear, central seat.
The device may be deactivated by (Position OFF ) the warning light on
operating (with the ignition key) the the instrument panel and the LED on 2
When the passenger side
relative key switch located on the the roof panel are on; children may
airbag is deactivated, because
right-hand side of the dashboard. The travel in the front passenger seat if a person considered by
switch is accessible with open door they are suitably protected by specific applicable legislation to be at risk is
only. rearward-facing restraint systems. travelling and must therefore be
Vehicles manufactured for the US, The warning light on the protected by an additional restraining
Canadian and Japanese markets are instrument panel and the LED on the system, the passenger will not have
not equipped with this device. roof panel remain permanently the additional protection of the airbag
illuminated until the passenger airbag in the event of a collision.
is reactivated.
Only deactivate the airbag
WARNING: should the warning light when you are carrying a
(passenger’s airbag off) person considered at risk by
malfunction, its failure will be shown applicable legislation, and always
on the display. reactivate it at the end of the journey.

WARNING: The deactivation of the


front passenger’s airbag does not
affect the operation of the side airbag.

When the door is open, the key can be


inserted or removed in both positions.

Front and side airbags 39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 40 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Front and rear lateral airbags The bags inflate instantaneously, the front passenger seat are protected
The lateral airbags enhance the acting as a protection between the from lateral collisions.
protection offered to passengers occupants' body and the side of the
vehicle. The bags deflate immediately WARNING: The front and/or lateral
travelling in the front seats in case of
afterwards. airbags may inflate if the vehicle
moderate to severe lateral collision.
suffers a violent impact beneath the
They consist of two types of
WARNING: The electronic control unit car body, for example when mounting
instantaneous inflation bags:
provides for the activation of the the pavement, colliding with steps or
– Side Bags housed in the front seats'
2 backrests; this solution allows the
pretensioners, front airbags or side speed bumps, potholes etc.
airbags (front and rear) based on
airbag to be always in the best different criteria, according to the type WARNING: Airbag inflation releases a
position with respect to the of impact. small amount of powder. This powder
occupant, regardless of the seat Failure of one or more systems to is not harmful and does not indicate
position. activate is not indicative of a system the presence of fire; furthermore the
– Window bags housed behind the malfunction. surface of the deployed bag and the
roof lateral panels and covered by interior of the vehicle may be covered
special trim panels that do not In the case of low impact lateral with a powdery residue: this powder
interfere with the bags' unfolding collisions (for which the retaining may irritate skin and eyes. If contact
downwards during inflation. This action of the seat belts affords occurs, wash with a pH neutral soap
solution, designed for protecting the adequate protection), the airbags do and water.
head region, offers passengers not inflate.
sitting in the front and in the rear It follows that the front airbags (on
the best protection in the case of a driver and passenger side) do not
side impact, thanks to the large area replace or substitute the seat belts but
covered by the bags. complement them, and hence the seat
In the event of a side impact, an belts must always be worn as provided
electronic control unit processes the by established legislation in European
signals coming from a deceleration and in most non-European countries.
sensor and it trips the bag inflation if The lateral airbags are not deactivated
necessary. when the front passenger airbag is cut-
out by means of the key-operated
switch, as described in the preceding
charter. Thus, even children carried in

40 Front and side airbags

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 41 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

If the warning light comes WARNING: In case of scrapping of the General warnings
on while driving (fault signal) vehicle, contact the Maserati Service
stop the vehicle and contact Network to have the system When the ignition key is
the local Maserati Service Centre to deactivated. turned to the MAR position,
have the system checked. the warning light comes
WARNING: If the vehicle is sold, the on, but it must switch off after approx.
WARNING: The airbag system has a new owner must be informed of the 5 seconds. If the warning light fails to
service life of 14 years. Contact the aforesaid instructions for use warnings come on at this time, or stays on, or
Maserati Service Network when this and he/she must also be provided with lights up when driving, contact the 2
period is near to expiry. the "Owner's Manual". Maserati Service Network
immediately.
In the event of a collision with Turning the ignition key to
consequent airbag inflation, MAR, the warning light
contact the Maserati Service and the LED A on the inside
Network for replacement of the entire roof, above the words PASSENGER AIR
safety system, electronic control unit, BAG OFF (with the front airbag
seat belts, pretensioners, and to have deactivation switch in the ON
the vehicle’s electrical system checked. position), will turn on and flash for
several seconds, to remind the driver
All testing, repairs and that the passenger and rear lateral
replacements of the airbag airbags will activate in case of
system must be done by a collision. Following this flashing they
Maserati Service Network Centre. must turn off.

Front and side airbags 41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 42 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Drive with both hands on the Do not cover the front If interventions are carried out
steering wheel rim, so that if seatbacks with clothes or on the electrical system
the airbag inflates it can do so covers. incorrectly, the airbag could
freely, without encountering obstacles be activated, thereby causing injuries
which can cause serious injuries. Do Note that with the ignition to anyone in the vicinity.
not drive with your body curved key inserted and turned to the
forwards but keep the seatback MAR position, even with the The airbags do not substitute
upright, lying your back fully against engine switched off, the airbags can the seat belts but afford
2 it. inflate even if the vehicle is stationary, supplementary protection.
if it is run into by another vehicle. Moreover, in the event of head-on
To permit the front airbags to Therefore, even with the vehicle collisions at low speed, side impacts,
be deployed correctly and stationary, children must be secured rear bumps or roll-overs, the
with the utmost efficiency, by the specific child restraint systems passengers are protected by the seat
both the driver and the front installed on the passenger seat, and belts only, that must always be
passenger must maintain a distance of the passenger airbag must be fastened.
at least 25 cm (10 in) from the steering deactivated. On the other hand, the
wheel and the dashboard respectively. airbags will not inflate in case of Do not wash the seats with
collision with the vehicle stationary water or pressurised steam
Do not apply stickers or other and the key removed from the ignition (by hand or in the automatic
objects to the steering wheel block; failure of the airbags to inflate seat wash stations).
or the passenger’s airbag in these circumstances is not indicative
compartment. of a system malfunction. Do not hang rigid objects onto
the cloth hooks and onto the
Do not travel with objects in If the vehicle has been the handholds.
your lap, in front of your chest object of theft or attempted
or especially with a pipe, theft, if it has been vandalized
pencil or other objects held in your or involved in flooding, contact the
mouth. In the event of a collision, the Maserati Service Network to have the
intervention of the airbag could result airbag system checked.
in serious injury.

42 Front and side airbags

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 43 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

MSP System Activation WARNING: In the event of a fault with


the MSP disabled, the vehicle will react
The MSP system is activated
as if it were not equipped with this
The vehicle is equipped with the MSP automatically every time the engine is
system: have the system checked by
(Maserati Stability Program) yaw started, and it can be cut-out by
the Maserati Service Network as soon
prevention monitoring system, pressing button A for approx. 2
as possible.
encompassing all of the vehicle's seconds. Press button A again to
control systems: ABS66, EBD, ASR and reactivate the system.
WARNING: Make sure that the ignition
MSR. The system is fitted with a unit The dark yellow warning light on
that predicts the vehicle's behaviour the instrument panel flashes during all
key is turned to STOP if you have to 2
tow the car with 2 wheels raised off
with extreme accuracy. The system is the activation phases.
the ground. Otherwise, with the MSP
capable of detecting whether the switched on, the respective control
driver is about to lose control of the Fault indicators unit will store a malfunction, resulting
vehicle. In this case, it can activate the In the event of a fault, the system is in the warning lights coming on
brake calipers individually and the automatically disabled and cannot be the instrument panel and on the
engine control, in order to create a reactivated. display: this requires the intervention
torque sufficient to resist the vehicle's While driving, this condition is of the Maserati Service Network to
yawing moment. signalled by the amber warning light restore the system.
, that illuminates both on the
instrument panel and on the multi- WARNING: In low- and medium-grip
function display, accompanied in the conditions (e.g., rain, snow, ice, sand,
latter case by the message "MSP etc.) it is advisable not to use SPORT
unavailable go to dealer". mode, even with the MSP system
When the engine is started, the system active.
malfunction is indicated by the
warning light switching on. WARNING: Driving on parabolic curves
will deactivate the system.

MSP System 43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 44 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

ASR system (electronic The ASR system works together with MSR function (engine braking
the electronic suspension control torque adjustment)
anti-skid device) system: under normal conditions The ASR system also controls the
(SPORT mode off), stability in low and engine braking torque when the
The ASR system prevents skidding of medium grip conditions has priority, accelerator pedal is released under low
the driving wheels during acceleration while with SPORT mode active, the grip conditions (snow, ice etc.): in
by means of the engine control unit system favours traction, thereby these conditions, in fact, the engine's
(spark advance delay, engine throttle optimising vehicle's performance on high braking torque may cause
2 opening reduction and fuel injection dry asphalt. instability of the vehicle.
cut-out) and of the rear brakes. The system, using the same sensors as
The ASR system enhances the vehicle Activation the ABS, detects the skidding arising
stability and improves active safety The ASR system is automatically on one or both of the driving wheels
while driving, especially under the activated every time the engine is when the accelerator is released and
following conditions: started and can be cut-out by pressing opens the motor driven throttle for the
– internal wheel skidding on curves button A for about 2 seconds. engine supply system, thereby
because of the dynamic load Press button A again to reactivate the reducing the braking torque and
variations or excessive acceleration system. restoring the driving wheels'
– excessive power transmitted to the The dark yellow warning light on maximum grip conditions.
wheels, also in relation to the the instrument panel flashes during all
roadbed conditions the activation phases. WARNING: The maximum deceleration
– acceleration on slippery, snowy or icy that can be obtained with the engine
roadbeds Fault indicators braking always depends on the tyre
In the event of a fault, the system is grip on the roadbed. Snow or ice
– loss of road grip on wet roadbeds obviously reduce grip levels.
(aquaplaning). automatically disabled and cannot be
reactivated. While driving, this
condition is signalled by the amber
warning light on the instrument
panel that illuminates together with
the message "ASR unavailable go to
dealer".

44 ASR system (electronic anti-skid device)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 45 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

ABS and EBD systems The failure will be indicated through Despite the fact that this
the lighting up of the red warning device makes a considerable
light with the letters ABS on the contribution to safety, it is still
The vehicle is equipped with ABS (Anti-
instrument panel. essential to drive particularly carefully
lock Brake System) and EBD (Electronic when the road surface is wet, covered
In this case, we recommend you
Brake force Distribution) systems with snow or ice.
contact the nearest Maserati Service
which, by means of the ABS system
Network centre, which, thanks to the
sensors and the ECU, improve the The vehicle is equipped with
self-diagnostics system the vehicle is
braking system’s performance.
In the event of an emergency stop or
equipped with, will be able to identify an EBD (Electronic Brake-force 2
the problem immediately. Distribution) system). With
braking on slippery surfaces (e.g. the engine on, if the warning light
snowy or icy roadbeds), the ABS, illuminates accompanied by a specific
The vehicles must be
together with the standard braking message on the display it indicates a
equipped only with wheels,
system, allows the driver to apply fault in the EBD system. In this case,
tyres and brake pads of the
maximum braking force without type and make approved by the sharp braking can cause early locking
causing the wheels to lock and Factory for this model. of the rear wheels and possible side
consequently losing control of the skidding. Drive with the greatest care
vehicle. and have the system immediately
The system is based on an electronic checked by the nearest Centre of the
control unit that processes the signals Maserati Service Network.
coming from 4 sensors fitted on the 4
wheels.
When a wheel tends to lock, the sensor
warns the unit which, in turn, request
to an electro-hydraulic unit to
intervene by modulating the pressure
exerted on the brake calipers; the
driver will perceive a “pulsation” on
the brake pedal which is completely
normal.
In the event of a failure, the system will
be deactivated, but this will not affect
the efficiency of the standard braking
system.
ABS and EBD systems 45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 46 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

The failure warning light If the low brake fluid warning System performance in terms
usually illuminates with the light comes on, stop the of active safety is not a reason
engine running to indicate a vehicle and check the brake for the driver to run
malfunction in the ABS system. In this fluid level immediately. If the fluid unnecessary risks. The driving style
case, the standard braking system is level is below the minimum notch, top shall always be suited to weather
still efficient, but cannot use the ABS up with the recommended fluid and conditions, range of visibility and road
system. In these conditions, also the contact the Maserati Service Network traffic conditions.
EBD system efficiency may be reduced. immediately to have the system
2 Drive with the greatest care in order to checked. Brake fluid leaks impair the The maximum obtainable
avoid sudden braking and have the operation of whatever braking deceleration is always
system immediately checked by the system, both the standard types and depends on the grip between
nearest Centre of the Maserati Service those fitted with anti-lock system. tyre and road. With snowy or icy
Network. roadbeds, grip levels are obviously
reduced and the braking distance is
very high, even with the ABS system.

46 ABS and EBD systems

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 47 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Tyre pressure monitoring The system is equipped with a specific System calibration
wiring that connects the aerials, the After replacing or inflating one or
system (optional) control unit and the calibration button more tyres, the system must be
to the vehicle's electrical system. calibrated once again.
The vehicle is equipped with a system
To calibrate the system, with the key in
that monitors the tyre pressure by The system warns the driver
the MAR position and the engine off,
means of special sensors that are that there is a drop in tyre
keep button A, located on the inside
secured inside the wheel rims, in pressure. This warning does
roof, pressed down for a time ranging
position with the inflation valve. These not exempt the driver from
between 4 and 10 seconds. 2
sensors transmit a signal that is periodically checking the tyres and
The system takes a maximum of 20
detected by the aerials fastened on the from complying with the prescribed
minutes to complete the calibration
car body, behind the gravel guards, tyre pressure levels.
procedure with the vehicle in motion.
and connected to the ECU.
A green symbol will appear on the
WARNING: The system stores the tyre
display together with the message
WARNING: The system can pressures as a reference rate, therefore
“Calibration activated”.
momentarily experience radio-electric tyres must be inflated to the prescribed
If the user recalls the information page
interference emitted by devices using pressure.
showing the pressure levels of each
similar frequencies.
tyre, dashes “–.–” will be viewed in the
place of the values.
The ECU processes this information
and, via the CAN line, transmits a series
of tyre pressure data and system
errors, if any, to the on-board
instrument panel.
The signal transmitted by the ECU
activates some ideograms on the
display.

Tyre pressure monitoring system (optional) 47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 48 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Viewing messages on the display When indication by event occurs, the


malfunction is viewed in the place of
By pressing the specific "Mode"
the information on tyre pressure
button B, (see page 77), the user can
levels. The malfunction is displayed for
access the information page showing
a time equal to its entire display cycle.
the pressure values for each tyre.
When the display cycle ends, the tyre
pressure screen page becomes
available again and the multi-function
2 symbol indicating the malfunction is
displayed in the specific area until the
malfunction is rectified.

48 Tyre pressure monitoring system (optional)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 49 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Normal conditions Low pressure The system may not know what wheel
By pressing the specific button for When the instrument panel receives a is originating the malfunction
quick information display ("Mode" message from the tyre pressure ECU indication and therefore is not capable
button pressed briefly), the user can indicating that one or more tyres have of indicating the wheel involved. In
access the information page (screen pressure levels below the control this case, screen page 3 will be
page 1), which displays the pressure threshold, screen page 2 is displayed displayed for 10 seconds.
levels for each tyre. for 10 seconds, after which the system The display sequence follows the usual
will display the screen page previously logic of the malfunction previously
active. described. 2
When the key is subsequently turned
back to ON or when the MODE button
is pressed, if the malfunction persists
the display will show screen page 2
once again.

1 2 3

Tyre pressure monitoring system (optional) 49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 50 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Tyre punctures The system may not know what wheel “Run Flat” tyre puncture
When the instrument panel receives a is originating the malfunction If the vehicle is equipped with Run Flat
signal from the tyre pressure ECU indication and therefore is not capable tyres, in the event of a tyre puncture,
indicating that the pressure level of of indicating the wheel involved. As a the relative warning light comes
one or more tyres is below the alarm consequence, in addition to the on and the pages 6 are alternately
threshold, the warning light will warning light permanently displayed for 10 seconds. At the end of
permanently illuminate on the illuminated on the instrument panel, the display cycle, the system will show
instrument panel and screen pages 4 the display will show screen page 5. the previously active page with the
2 will alternate on the display for 20 The display strategy of this screen page symbol positioned in area G of the
seconds. Every time the key is follows the same logic applied for display (see page 76). The warning
subsequently turned back to ON, if the screen page 4 previously described. light on the instrument panel
malfunction persists the display will remains on.
show screen pages 4 for 20 seconds. The system calculates the residual tyre
These screen pages will be displayed life in km and repeats the display cycle
until the situation is corrected and the every 30 km of driving up to a
system is calibrated again as required maximum of 120 km.
by the system.

4 5 6

50 Tyre pressure monitoring system (optional)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 51 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

During the "tyre punctured" If another tyre is punctured, the system If the driver presses the MODE button
condition, if more than 120 km are calculates (without displaying it) the with the "Escape" function during the
travelled or if the vehicle speed updated value of the km that can still "tyre punctured" condition, but not in
exceeds 80 km/h, the pages 7 or 8, be driven, depending on the distance maximum speed conditions and with
respectively, are displayed. At the end covered from the previous puncture, the tyres still in a condition to
of the tyre life, the display logic and displays the pages 9 alternately. continue driving , the summary symbol
follows the procedure for normal will be displayed in the dedicated
tyres. warning light area until the correct
condition is restored and after 2
subsequent calibration requested by
the system.

7 8 9

Tyre pressure monitoring system (optional) 51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 52 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

It may occur that the system does not System not calibrated Tyre pressure monitoring
know which wheel is signalling the
System not calibrated system failure
fault and it is hence unable to display Tyre pressure monitoring system
If the system has not been calibrated or
it: page 10 will be displayed for 10 failure
following a tyre replacement, the
seconds.The system calculates the Screen page 12 is displayed in the
warning light will flash on the
residual tyre life and repeats the instrument panel for 90 seconds, and following cases:
display cycle every 30 km of driving up the display will show screen page 11. – malfunction in the ECU system/
to a maximum of 120 km and also
Subsequently, the screen page wiring
2 controls the conditions of exceeding
previously active is displayed once – no signal reception by one or more
the maximum km travelled or
again and the warning light on the sensors due to malfunctioning,
exceeding the speed limit. instrument panel illuminates broken or flat battery
permanently.
The system can be calibrated by means – ECU malfunction.
of the specific button (see page 47). The display procedure follows the
The information page that shows the usual logic of malfunctions. Therefore,
pressure value for each tyre cannot be after 10 seconds, the display will show
recalled. the screen page that was active before
the malfunction occurred.

10 11 12

52 Tyre pressure monitoring system (optional)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 53 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

In addition to screen page 12 the System temporarily not active System not active
warning light which is
When one of the following conditions After the key is turned on, in the case
permanently illuminated on the
occurs: that the system has been deactivated
instrument panel, will flash for 90
– ooutside transmitter (frequency by means of the diagnostic tester,
seconds, after which it will remain
interferences); screen page 14 will be displayed.
permanently on until the situation is
In addition, the warning light
corrected. The information page that – oexcessive temperature
which is permanently illuminated on
shows the pressure value for each tyre – oduring the first calibration the instrument panel, will flash for 90
cannot be recalled. procedure seconds, after which it will remain 2
screen page 13 is displayed. permanently on until the situation is
In addition, the warning light corrected.
which is permanently illuminated on The information page that shows the
the instrument panel, will flash for 90 pressure value for each tyre cannot be
seconds, after which it will remain recalled.
permanently on until the situation is
corrected.
The information page that shows the
pressure value for each tyre cannot be
recalled.

13 14

Tyre pressure monitoring system (optional) 53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 54 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Parking sensors If the vehicle is also equipped with frequency increases as the vehicle
front sensors, these may be activated approaches the obstacle.
by pressing button A; When the front The acoustic signals are emitted by two
To assist the driver during parking
sensors are active, the button buzzers, one under the dashboard (if
manoeuvres, the vehicle may come
illuminates with an amber colour. To the vehicle is equipped with front
equipped with four sensors housed in
deactivate the front sensors, press sensors) and one in proximity of the
the rear bumper and four sensors in
button A once again. When reverse luggage shelf (if the vehicle is
the front bumper (optionals in the
gear is disengaged, all the sensors equipped with rear sensors).
latter case).
2 During parking manoeuvres, the
remain active. The rear sensors remain When the obstacle is located at a
active for about 10 seconds or until a distance of less than 35 cm from the
parking sensors provide the driver with
speed of approx. 10 Km/h (6 mph) is bumper, the beep is continuous. The
information on the distance between
exceeded. The front sensors remain warning beep stops immediately if the
obstacles found behind and in front of
active until a speed of about 10 Km/h distance between the vehicle and the
the vehicle. The information about the
(6 mph) is exceeded. obstacle increases.
obstacle distance is given to the driver
The tone cycle is constant if the
by means of a acoustic and visual
When the rear or front sensors are distance measured by the central
signals. The acoustic signals generated
activated, an acoustic signal (beep) sensors remains unaltered, while if this
by the system add to the driver’s field
warns the driver that the system is occurs with the lateral sensors, the
of vision, allowing him to avoid hitting
active. signal stops after approximately 7
any obstacles during manoeuvres.
When the sensors are activated, the seconds, to prevent for example
system begins to beep as soon as an continuous beeps in the event of
However, the driver remains
obstacle is detected, and the tone manoeuvres alongside walls.
responsible during parking
manoeuvres and in other
potentially dangerous situations. The
system has actually been designed
only as a supplementary aid during
parking manoeuvres, since it allows
the driver to detect obstacles outside
his field of vision.
A
The front and rear parking sensors are
automatically activated when the key
is turned to MAR, when reversing.

54 Parking sensors

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 55 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

The distance from the obstacles can Stop & Go function Cleaning the sensors
also be graphically shown on the
The vehicle is equipped with a Stop & When cleaning the sensors, take
instrument panel display by means of
Go function that can be activated special care not to scratch or damage
an image that shows the vehicle
through the Multi Media System. The them; therefore, do not use dry, rough
surrounded by explanatory symbols of
Stop & Go function can be enabled/ or hard cloths.
the distance (maximum/average/
disabled by accessing the The sensors must be washed with clean
minimum) and the position (front/rear/
“Configuration” menu, selecting the water, possibly with car shampoo
central/side) of the obstacle detected.
“Define vehicle parameters” option, added. In car-washes which use steam
The colour represents the distance,
then the Stop & Go parking option and jet or high pressure cleaning machines, 2
while the field represents the position.
setting it to “Activation”. With the keep the nozzle at least 10 cm away
The green colour represents the
Stop & Go function active, the front from the sensors.
maximum distance detected, the
sensors will automatically be activated Should you need to repaint the
yellow colour the medium distance
in all conditions where the vehicle bumper or in case of paint touch-ups in
and the red colour the minimum one.
speed goes below 8 Km/h (5 mph). the sensor area, please contact
If the vehicle is equipped only with
exclusively the Maserati Service
rear sensors, the front sensors are not WARNING: The Stop & Go function is Network. Incorrect paint application
shown in the image. only available if the vehicle is could affect the parking sensor
If the vehicle is equipped with front equipped with front parking sensors. operation.
and rear sensors, the rear sensors are
not shown in the image if only the For the system to operate
front sensors are active. correctly the sensors
positioned on the bumper
must be kept clean (remove any mud,
dirt, snow or ice).

Parking sensors 55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 56 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Sensor range In the event of an obstacle located in a


The sensors allow the system to central area, this will be detected at
monitor the front and rear of the distances of less than 0.9 m at the front
vehicle; they are positioned so as to and 1.50 m at the rear, depending on
monitor the central and lateral zones the type of obstacle and its
at the front and at the rear of the dimensions.
vehicle. If the obstacle is located in a lateral
position, it will be detected at
2 distances of less than 0.6 m (2 feet).

56 Parking sensors

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 57 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Failure indicators During parking manoeuvres, The driver is fully responsible


always be extremely careful for parking and other
The system ECU checks all the
with obstacles that might be potentially dangerous
components every time reverse gear is
located above or below the sensors. In manoeuvres. During these
engaged.
fact, in certain circumstances, objects manoeuvres, always make sure there
In the event that the parking sensors
located near the rear of the vehicle are are no people (especially children) or
fail, the relative warning light
not detected by the system and animals in the manoeuvring area. The
illuminates on the display,
therefore could damage the vehicle or parking sensors must be considered an
accompanied by the message "Parking
help unavailable".
be damaged themselves. aid for the driver who, in any case, 2
must never take less care during
In the event of a failure signal, stop the
The signals transmitted by the potentially dangerous manoeuvres,
vehicle and turn the ignition key to
sensors can also be altered by even at low speeds.
Stop. Then try cleaning the sensors or
damage to the sensors or by
moving the vehicle away from any
dirt, snow or ice on the latter or even
possible ultrasound sources (e.g. by ultrasound systems (e.g. pneumatic
pneumatic truck brakes or pneumatic truck brakes or pneumatic hammers)
hammers) and rotate the ignition key in the vicinity.
to the MAR position. This way, if the
cause of the operating fault has been
removed, the system will start
functioning again automatically and
the failure buzzer will stop.
If however, the failure beep continues,
contact the Maserati Service Network
to have the system checked.

Parking sensors 57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 58 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Fuel cut-out inertia switch After impact, if you smell fuel Resetting the switch
or note any leakage from the
Turn the ignition key to the STOP
fuel supply system, do not
The vehicle is equipped with a safety position.
reactivate the switch in order to avoid
switch which intervenes in the event of Check that there is no leakage from
fire risks.
a collision, cutting off the fuel supply the fuel system.
and consequently causing the engine If no leaks are found, reset the inertia
The activation of the inertia switch
to stop. It also prevents fuel leaks if the switch which stops the fuel pump
results in all the doors and the luggage
fuel lines are damaged during the operation, by pressing button A on the
2 accident.
compartment unlocking and in the
switch.
internal dome lamp and the four
Activation of the safety switch is Turn the ignition key to the MAR
direction indicators switching on.
signalled by the illumination of the position, wait a few seconds and then
warning light on the display. move it to the ACC position.
The switch is positioned underneath Check that the warning light on
the front left-hand seat. the display is off.
Check once again that there are no
fuel leaks.

58 Fuel cut-out inertia switch

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 59 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Fuel cut-out inertia switch 59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap3_FOTO_ing.fm Page 60 Friday, May 30, 2008 2:17 PM

60

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap3_FOTO_ing.fm Page 61 Friday, May 30, 2008 2:17 PM

Instruments and controls

Dashboard 62
Instrument panel 68
Indicators and warning lights 69
Instruments and gauges 75
Controls 81
Internal outfits 87
3

61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 62 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Dashboard

36

37

3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 10 14 15 16 17 3 2 1

35 34

18

19

20

22
25

33 32 31 30 29 27 28 27 26 24 21 23

62 Dashboard

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 63 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

1) Air conditioning and heating system 12) Sun radiation sensor 26) Ignition/steering lock switch
vents 13) Clock 27) Multi Media System Controls
2) Side windows vents 14) Side buttons, to the right of the repeated on the steering wheel
3) Speaker Multi Media System Display 28) CD-changer compartment
4) Cruise Control, Direction indicators 15) Glove compartment opening 29) Steering wheel height and depth
control lever button adjustment control
5) Instrument panel 16) Glove compartment 30) Glove compartment
6) Driver’s airbag and horn 17) Passenger’s airbag 31) Engine compartment lid opening
7) Windscreen/headlight wiper/washer 18) Multi Media System Display lever
control lever 19) Multi Media System Controls 32) Controls to the left of the steering
8) Controls to the right of the steering wheel 3
20) Air conditioning and heating
wheel system controls 33) Controls on driver's door
9) Side buttons, to the left of the Multi 21) Hazard button 34) External rear-view mirror controls
Media System Display 35) Internal door opening handle
22) Automatic gearshift lever
10) Central air-conditioning and 36) Roof controls
23) Ashtray with cigarette lighter
heating system vents
24) Electric handbrake engagement/ 37) Front dome lamp
11) Upper air conditioning and heating
disengagement lever
system vent
25) Gear display

Dashboard 63

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 64 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Ref. 8 Controls to the right of the Ref. 9 and 14 Side buttons on the Multi Ref. 27 Multi Media System Controls
steering wheel Media System display repeated on the steering wheel
A - AudioPilot® Sensor (see page 148) A - SPORT mode button A - Increases the sound system volume.
B - Instrument panel brightness B - LOW-GRIP (ICE) mode button B - Decreases the sound system
increase C - PARK OFF function button (see volume.
C - Instrument panel brightness page 181) C - Voice control function activation/
decrease D - MSP system deactivation button deactivation.
D - Trip MODE button and odometer Navigator Mode: Enables the
E - Door lock/unlock button
reset. guiding voice during the trip
F - Sunshade raising/lowering button. guidance and also displays
information pertaining to the
3 guidance session.
D - Button pressed briefly
Telephone mode activation.
Send telephone call.
Accept incoming call.
End telephone call in progress.
Button pressed at length
Reject incoming telephone call.

A A
A B
E
B B

C C
F
D C D
D

64 Dashboard

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 65 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

E - Button pressed briefly I - Radio mode: radio frequency shift Ref. 29 Steering wheel height and
Radio mode: Search for the first to the next station in preset steps, depth adjustment control
tuneable station with higher starting from the station currently
frequency; tuned.
CD, Jukebox and USB mode: next CD, MP3, Jukebox and USB mode:
track selection. selects next folder.
Button pressed at length Menu: scrolls through the menus.
CD audio mode: track fast forward. J - Radio mode: radio frequency shift
F - Button pressed briefly to the previous station in fixed
Radio mode: Search for the first steps, starting from the station
tuneable station with lower currently tuned.
frequency; CD, MP3, Jukebox and USB mode: 3
CD, Jukebox and USB mode: goes selects the previous folder.
to previous track if selected within Menu: scrolls through the menus.
the first 3 seconds of track playing, K - Confirms the function, item or
otherwise the track is played again value selected.
from the beginning.
Button pressed at length
CD audio mode: track fast rewind
G - Mode selection: radio, CD or
Jukebox.
H - Mute function on/off.

E
I
F
K
G
J

Dashboard 65

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 66 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Ref. 32 Controls to the left of the Ref. 33 Controls on driver's door Rear tunnel controls
steering wheel A - Rear power window lock/unlock A - Door lock/unlock buttons
A - Light switch control B - Sunshade raising/lowering buttons
B - Fuel tank flap opening button B - Easy entry/exit system deactivation
C - Luggage compartment lid opening device
button C - Rear left-hand power window
D - Rear central headrest tilting button control
E - Front parking sensors activation. D - Rear right-hand power window
control
E - Front left-hand power window
3 control
F - Front right-hand power window
control
G - External rear-view mirror control

A C E G
A B

A B C D E
B D F
66 Dashboard

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 67 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Rear vents Ref. 36 Roof controls Ref. 37 Controls on front dome lamp
A - Central vents on tunnel A - Alarm system anti-lift feature cut- fixture
B - Side vents on pillars out F - LH side light switch
B - Alarm system motion sensors cut- G - Central light switch
out
H - RH side light switch.
C - Telephone handsfree microphone
D - Tyre pressure calibration control
E - Passenger's airbag deactivation
warning light.

A B C D E
B A
F G H

Dashboard 67

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 68 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Instrument panel 3) Display


4) Rev. Counter
1) Fuel level gauge and low fuel 5) Coolant temperature gauge and
warning light high temperature warning light
2) Tachometer

3 1 2 3 4 5

68 Instrument panel

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 69 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Indicators and warning Alternator failure WARNING: When the ignition key is
turned to the MAR position, if the
lights If there is a fault in the
warning light does not switch on
recharging system.
or if it switches on while driving,
When the battery is insufficiently
Rear fog lights contact the Maserati Service Network
charged or overcharged (flashing).
as soon as possible.
When the rear fog lights are
turned on. Engine diagnosis system
failure (EOBD) (*) Automatic Gearbox
failure (*)
Fog lights Under normal conditions, this
Depending on the message
When the high beams are warning light should switch on when
displayed it signals:
turned on. the ignition key is turned to the MAR
position and switch off as soon as the – Gearbox failure. 3
Position lights/low engine is started. This will show that If the failure permits, slowly drive to
beams the warning light is working properly. the nearest Maserati Service Centre.
This switches on when the If the warning light remains on or – Gearbox oil temperature too high.
position lights, low beams or parking switches on while driving, it indicates
In this case, slow down until the
lights are turned on. that there is a failure in the fuel supply/
temperature goes down to the normal
ignition and emission control systems.
values for use (the warning light goes
High beams The failure could cause high exhaust
off), see page 162.
emissions, loss of performance, poor
When the high beams are vehicle handling and high consumption
turned on or flashing. levels.
In these conditions you can proceed
Parking lights slowly without demanding engine
With the key removed, this performance or high speeds.
indicates the parking lights Prolonged use of the vehicle when the
are turned on. warning light is on can cause damages.
For this reason, you should contact the
Maserati Service Network as soon as
possible. The warning light will go out
if the problem disappears. The error
will be stored by the system in any
case.
Indicators and warning lights 69

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 70 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Low oil pressure (*) Low brake fluid warning Seat belts (*)
Under normal conditions, the light (*) This switches on when the
warning light should It illuminates when the brake driver's seat belt is not
illuminate when the ignition key is fluid level goes below the minimum fastened or fastened improperly.
turned to MAR and should go off as level. If accompanied by a specific
soon as the engine is started. message, it indicates an EBD system Airbag/pre-tensioner
If the warning light remains on or failure. In this case, do not apply the failure (*)
illuminates while driving, this indicates brakes suddenly, since this may cause This indicates that the pre-
a too low engine oil pressure. In this an early locking of the rear wheels. tensioner and/or airbag system is/are
case, turn the engine off immediately Drive with the greatest care and have inefficient.
and carry out the necessary checks. the system immediately checked by the
3 If the problem persists, contact the nearest Centre of the Maserati Service Turning the key to MAR, the
Maserati Service Network. Network. light comes on but it should
If it flashes, it indicates a failure of the go out after a few seconds
engine oil pressure sensor. If the warning light comes on with the engine running.
while driving, check the brake
Tyre pressure (*) fluid level immediately. If the If the warning light stays on
fluid level is below the minimum level or if it does not come on, or if
This warning light is
there could be a leakage in the circuit: it comes on while driving,
connected to the tyre
in this case, contact the Maserati stop immediately and consult the
pressure monitoring system.
Service Network before continuing Maserati Service Network.
In normal conditions, the warning
your trip.
light should illuminate when the
ignition key is turned to MAR and
should go off as soon as the engine is
Defective ABS system (*)
started. If the warning light remains on It illuminates when the ABS
or illuminates while driving, it system is not functioning.
indicates a too low inflation pressure The normal braking system remains
of one or more tyres. operational, but it is advisable to
contact the Maserati Service Network
as soon as possible.

70 Indicators and warning lights

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 71 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Passenger’s airbag Parking brake failure (*) MSP system failure (*)
deactivated Depending on the message It indicates a malfunction or
This warning light switches displayed, it signals the the deactivation of the MSP
on when the passenger’s airbag is following EPB system failures: system.
deactivated. – Parking brake failure. When flashing, it indicates that the
MSP system has activated.
slowly drive to the nearest Centre of
Maserati CODE (*) the Maserati Service Network and
The warning light illuminates remember that the electric parking
Right-hand direction
when the vehicle protection indicators
brake is not functioning.
system is faulty. If the brake failure is accompanied by This lights up when the right-
hand direction indicators or the hazard
Brake pads worn (*)
the message "EPB failure only manual
lights are turned on.
3
unlock allowed: see handbook", the
This illuminates when the manual emergency deactivation
brake pads have reached procedure must be performed to Left-hand direction
their wear limit. release the parking brake (see indicators
Contact the the Maserati Service page 181). This lights up when the left-
Network. – Excessive temperature. hand direction indicators or the hazard
If the vehicle has been stationary (key lights are turned on.
Handbrake engaged to STOP) for about 15 minutes without
The warning light comes on using the parking brake, and the
when the handbrake is warning light illuminates again after
operated. restarting the engine, slowly drive to
the nearest Centre of the Maserati
Service Network.
– Parking brake system overhaul
The EPB system must be serviced and
maintained only by the Maserati
Service Network if any system
malfunctions need to be corrected.

(*) Viewed on the display as well


Indicators and warning lights 71

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 72 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Warning lights on the display Stop lights failure could be damaged. Drive slowly to the
nearest workshop.
This switches on in the case of
Inertia switch, fuel a system failure or burning-
cut-out enabled If the light turns on
out of the stop lights bulb.
This switches on when a permanently 3 times the
collision triggers the inertia switch, engine will stop. It will be
Twilight sensor failure
thus cutting off the fuel supply. possible to restart the vehicle only
This switches on in the case of with a key-off / key-on cycle. Then
a failure of the twilight slowly drive to the nearest service
After impact, if fuel is smelt or
sensor. center.
leakage is noted from the fuel
system, do not reactivate the
3 switch in order to prevent the risk of
Catalyst temperature too Maserati declines all
fire.
high responsibility for whatever
This warning light comes on if damage deriving from non
the engine runs irregularly with compliance with the above mentioned
Windscreen washer fluid
consequent high temperature in the warnings.
This signals a low level of
exhaust system.
washer fluid in the Power steering failure
windscreen washer tank.
IF THE WARNING LIGHT IS This indicates a fault in the
ACCOMPANIED BY THE power steering system.
Cruise Control MESSAGE “HIGH CATALYSTS Drive slowly to the nearest Maserati
This indicates that the TEMPERATURE SLOW DOWN”: the Service Centre, watching out for the
constant speed regulator, temperature of the catalytic stiffened steering.
Cruise Control, is active. converters is too high. The driver must
slow down immediately until the Low engine oil level
Lights failure warning light turns off.
Indicates that the engine oil
It illuminates in the case of a level is low; to check it see
system failure or if the IF THE MESSAGE “EXCESSIVE
CATALYSTS TEMPERATURE DO page 243.
position, direction indicator, rear fog
and number plate lights are blown. NOT DRIVE ON” APPEARS
AFTER DECELERATING: the
temperature in the catalytic
converters has reached a dangerous
level and the catalytic converters
72 Indicators and warning lights

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 73 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Excessive coolant Rain sensor failure Vehicle protection


temperature This indicates that the rain systems
Combined with the "Coolant sensor is faulty. It illuminates when the
thermometer", it illuminates together system detects one of the following
with the warning light on the Parking sensors failure malfunctions:
instrument panel and indicates an This indicates a failure in the – Alarm system not available.
excessive temperature of the coolant. parking sensors system. – Electronic key not detected
In this condition, stop the vehicle and
have the cooling system checked by – Have the vehicle protection system
Shock absorber failure checked
the Maserati Service Network.
When driving, it indicates a – Vehicle break-in detected.
Adaptive Light Control malfunction in the suspension
– Electronic key not recognised. 3
system failure system.
It indicates a failure of the Doors and lids open
Finger-trap prevention
automatic headlight aiming system. system failure This indicates that the doors
or lids are open or improperly
ASR system failure This indicates a failure in the
closed: the part not closed is
windows’ finger-trap prevention
It indicates that the ASR highlighted in red.
system.
system is faulty.
In the event of a failure, contact the WARNING: Before driving off, close
Before and during activation
Maserati Service Network. any doors and lids that are either open
of the power window, always
or not properly closed.
check that the passengers are
not exposed to the risk of injury both
by the moving window and by
personal objects that could be
dragged or hit by it.

Indicators and warning lights 73

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 74 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Ice hazard Vehicle “SPORT” setting


This switches on when the When the button that sets
outside temperature is 3 °C the vehicle to the "SPORT"
(37 °F) or lower, in order to indicate the mode is pressed.
risk of icy roadbed. Under such
conditions, drive carefully and slow WARNING: The "SPORT" mode
down as the grip of the tyres will prove changes the vehicle driving features.
to be markedly reduced.
WARNING: SPORT mode should not be
Do not activate the "SPORT" activated if the road surface is in rough
mode in this situation. or slippery.
3
WARNING: In low- and medium-grip
conditions (e.g., rain, snow, ice, sand,
Scheduled maintenance etc.) it is advisable not to activate
SPORT mode, even with the MSP
Depending on the
enabled.
accompanying message, this
indicates that service schedule
"Low grip" function
deadlines are either approaching or
due on that day. ICE This indicates that the low
Upon reaching a deadline, contact the grip function is active
Maserati Service Network.
EPB automatic operation
Automatic gearbox disabled
AUTO setting It indicates that the EPB
This indicates that the automatic activation/deactivation
automatic gearbox feature is active. function is disabled.

74 Indicators and warning lights

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 75 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Instruments and gauges Tachometer (2) Rev. Counter (4)


It indicates the vehicle speed. The It indicates the engine's r.p.m. Correct
Fuel level gauge (1) gauge starts providing data when driving allows the driver to exploit the
4 Km/h (2.5 mph) are exceeded. engine performance fully, without the
The lighting up of the warning light
need of over-revving.
inside the gauge indicates that there
are approx. 18 litres (4 UK gal) of fuel
in the tank.

Instruments and gauges 75

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 76 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Coolant temperature gauge (5) Display (3) E - Total odometer,


It indicates the temperature of the Incorporated in the instrument panel, F - Trip odometer A, B or vehicle speed
coolant. If the needle indicates high it performs the following functions: repetition.
temperatures and at the same time the – it provides general information G - Other symbols that may be
warning light switches on, stop the while driving; displayed in icon form
vehicle immediately and have the H - Outside temperature
– it signals of any failures and
cooling system checked by the
warnings; From the set-up menu in the Multi
Maserati Service Network.
The user can interact with the system Media System, the user can also choose
by setting the parameters for the to have the information displayed for
information that can be recalled. the Audio and Navigator repeated on
3 The screen page displayed following the dashboard. For the relevant
the initial check cycle, in normal procedures and instructions, see the
working conditions, (standard screen "Multi Media System" manual.
page) contains the following
information:
A - Date
B - Time
C - Gear engaged
D - Driving mode

B H

D G

E F

76 Instruments and gauges

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 77 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Controls Pressing the MODE button at length “+ “ and “-”


MODE (over 2 seconds) the user will select the By means of the “+ “(K) and “-” (L)
The screen page activation and setting Trip Odometer information currently buttons, the user can adjust the
is controlled by pressing the MODE (J), displayed, or the Trip Odometer A if instrument panel brightness.
“+” (K) and “-” (L) buttons. the tachometric repetition is active. When the "Option Selection" screen
Pressing the MODE button briefly will This piece of information will flash for page is viewed, these buttons can be
switch to the following screens in 10 seconds, after which the non- used to select, choosing between Trip
sequence: flashing information previously Odometer A and Trip Odometer B, the
viewed is restored. information to be repeated on the
– Trip A display. In fact, by selecting , Odo A or
– Trip B Odo B, with the MODE (J) button and
– Tyre pressure then pressing buttons “+ “ and “-”, the 3
– Left-hand front seat comfort (*) user will display the trip information
selected (flashing) alternately.
– Right-hand front seat comforto (*)
– Option Selection Trip Odometer reset
– RPM indicator In all these cases, and before the 10
– Standard. seconds are up, pressing the MODE (J)
button briefly (less than 2 seconds) will
result in the trip information relating
(*) if the vehicle is equipped with
to the flashing Odometer (A or B)
“Comfort Pack” or “Winter Pack”.
being reset.
Each of these has a 10-second timing,
Setting the date
after which the non-flashing
The date can be set by means of the set
information previously viewed is
up menu of the Multi Media System
restored. K (see Multi Media System Manual).

J L

Instruments and gauges 77

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 78 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

TRIP screen page Tyre pressure screen page – low pressure or puncture in front LH,
The Trip screen page is recalled by If the vehicle is equipped with the tyre front RH tyres or rear LH and rear RH
pressing the MODE (J) button. Each pressure monitoring system (optional), tyres
TRIP screen page (A or B) is timed, i.e. it pressing the MODE (J) button the user – low pressure or puncture in
is displayed for a maximum of 10 will display information about the unidentified tyre.
seconds, after which the screen "Tyre Pressure". The system can be calibrated by
previously active is restored. This screen page is displayed for 10 pressing button M, on the front dome
When the TRIP A or TRIP B feature is seconds and, in normal conditions, it light fixture. The initialisation of the
active, the following information is will appear as shown in figure 1 procedure is indicated on the display
viewed on the display: – furthermore, the system by the message “Calibration
– travelled distance (km - miles) acknowledges the following activated”.
3 conditions: For more information, please see the
– average fuel consumption (km/L –
mpg) – system temporarily not active (es. “Tyre pressure monitoring system”
external radio interference) chapter on page 47.
– average travelling speed (km/h -
mph) – system not calibrated (e.g. tyre
– trip time (hh:mm) replaced)
– fuel range (km - miles) – system failure
The unit of measurement can be set – system not active (if it is disabled by
through the set up menu of the Multi the diagnostics system)
Media System.

78 Instruments and gauges

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 79 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Comfort screen page P - Ventilation level; Option Selection Screen Page


If the vehicle is equipped with either Q - Massage system activation/ Briefly press the MODE button to
the “Winter Pack” or the “Comfort deactivation; display the screen page and select the
Pack” on the front seats, repeatedly R - Self-adaptive system activation/ desired value among the following
press the MODE button to display the deactivation. ones:
screen pages showing the system – TRIP A distance;
In both cases, the screen pages are
operating mode for each individual
displayed for 10 seconds and appear as – TRIP B distance;
seat.
shown in Figures 2 and 3. – Current speed repetition,
If the vehicle is equipped with “Winter
Pack”, the following seat information – Passenger compartment
is shown: temperature on the driver’s side;
N - Seat indication; which will be displayed in area F (see 3
O - Heating level. page 76), within the standard screen
If the vehicle is equipped with page.
“Comfort Pack”, the following seat The screen page, shown in Fig. 4,
information is shown: remains displayed for 10 seconds.
N - Seat indication; The options listed can be selected by
pressing the “+” and “-“ buttons and
O - Heating level;
are confirmed by briefly pressing the
MODE button or simply not
performing any operation for 10
seconds.

2 3 4
N N

O O P

Q
R

Instruments and gauges 79

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 80 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

RPM indicator screen page If the Audio or Navigation data Multi Media System
The "RPM Indicator" screen page repetition option is active on the Multi configuration menu
allows the user to display, within the Media System, when the user sets the By accessing the Configuration mode,
standard screen page, also a virtual virtual RPM indicator this setting shall the user can set-up the vehicle
RPM gauge. be ignored until the repetition features.
The screen page can be recalled by function is disabled (see page 84 of the The parameters that can be set are the
pressing the MODE button repeatedly, Multi Media System manual). following:
and the options available, which can – Display configuration
be selected by pressing the buttons + • select the colour (choosing between
and -, are the following: day/night mode or automatic
– ON (display enabled); setting)
3
– OFF (display disabled). • adjust the brightness
This function is activated if the user -Sound
presses the MODE button to confirm • voice control volume
this option. • speech synthesis setting
– Language selection (Italian, English,
Spanish, German, French, Dutch,
American)
– Define vehicle parameters
• speed limit
• instrument panel buzzer volume
• door and luggage compartment
5 locking
• info repetition on instrument panel
• Stop & Go parking sensors
• easy Entry
• day lights.

80 Instruments and gauges

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 81 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Controls Hazard warning lights Controls to the left of the


Press button B to turn on the hazard steering wheel
warning lights. Their operation is Front fog lights
Horn
independent of the ignition key Press button C to switch on the front
Pressing the horn symbol A, the horn is
position. Press the button again to turn fog lights. They only work with the
activated.
them off. position lights or low beams on. The
When these lights are on, the direction LED on the button switches on when
indicators, the related warning lights the lights are on.
on the instrument panel and the
button are flashing. Rear fog lights
Press button D to switch on the rear
WARNING: When the hazard warning fog lights. They only work with the 3
lights are activated, the direction front fog lights or low beams on. The
indicators control is disabled. LED on the pushbutton switches on
when the lights are on.

Do not use the rear fog lights


in normal visibility conditions
to avoid dazzling vehicles
behind.

B
C D

Controls 81

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 82 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Opening the luggage compartment Opening the fuel tank flap Rear central headrest tilting
Press button E to open the luggage Press button F to open the fuel tank Press button G to tilt the rear central
compartment lid. flap on the rear right-hand side of the headrest. The headrest can be then
This can be operated only with the vehicle. repositioned manually.
ignition key removed or turned to This button can be operated only when
STOP and ACC. the ignition key is removed or in the Before doing so, always check
STOP position. that the passengers are not
exposed to the risk of injury
both by the moving headrest and by
personal objects that could be hit by it.

E F G

82 Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 83 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Activating the front parking sensors Controls to the right of the Mode
The front parking sensors can be steering wheel Pressing button L will select the screen
deactivated by pressing button H. Instrument panel display controls (see pages to be viewed on the instrument
When these sensors are cut-out, the page 77). panel display.
LED on the button turns on. To
reactivate the sensors, press button H Setting the instruments and gauges' AudioPilot® Sensor
again. brightness The sensor M detects the surrounding
With the external lights turned on, noise and consequently adjusts the
press button J or K to increase or stereo equalizer (see page 148).
decrease the brightness for the
instruments and gauges.
3

M
J

L
H

Controls 83

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 84 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Side buttons on the Multi Media Sunshade movement SPORT mode


System display Press button P to raise the sunshade Press button R to select SPORT mode,
Lock set release and locking and button Q to lower it. which activates "Automatic Gearbox"
Buttons N and O, on the front and rear The buttons are found both on the and sets the suspension and traction
dashboards, control the locking and front and on the rear dashboard. control for sports-style driving.
unlocking of the lock sets respectively. Please notice that selecting the SPORT
WARNING: If the sunshade guide mode will decrease driving comfort
needs to be cleaned with solvents, it markedly. This will be perceived above
must then be greased in the area all in the city traffic and on uneven
where the sunshade slides using Teflon road surfaces.
based grease.
3
WARNING: If, within a time period of
25 seconds, the sunshades are raised
and lowered at least 4 times, the
relative control will disable them for
30 seconds. Before disabling the
sunshade, the system will complete the
movement in progress. The last
movement accepted will be opposite
to the starting movement.

R
N

P
O

84 Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 85 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Low grip PARK OFF MSP System


This mode can be used on particularly This function allows the user to The MSP system activates
slippery road surfaces (e.g., rain, snow, deactivate automatic engagement of automatically every time the engine is
ice). To activate/deactivate this mode, the electric parking brake (EPB) (see started.
press button S. page 181). Press the button T to It is possible to disconnect or reconnect
When the function is active, the word deactivate/reactivate the function. the system while driving by pressing
ICE lights up on the display. button U. To avoid deactivating the
system inadvertently, the button must
be pressed for about 2 seconds to turn
the MSP system off.
When the system is deactivated, the
amber warning light on the 3
instrument panel lights up.

T
S

Controls 85

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 86 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Roof controls Tyre calibration button


Deactivating the alarm system To calibrate the system, with the
motion sensors ignition key in position MAR, press
Pressing button V will deactivate the button X for a time ranging from 4 to
alarm motion sensing system. When 10 seconds.
this function is deactivated, the LED on The system will take a maximum of 20
the button will flash for 3 seconds and minutes to complete the calibration
then will turn off. procedure with the vehicle in motion.
The detected situation will then be
Deactivating the anti-lift alarm shown on the display.
system For further information, see the “Tyre
3 Pressing button W will deactivate the pressure monitoring system” on
anti-lift alarm system. When this page 47.
function is deactivated, the led on the
button will flash for 3 seconds and
then turn off.

W V X

86 Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 87 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Internal outfits Improper use of the sunroof Opening and closing


can however be dangerous, The selector switch A controls all the
even if the finger-trap roof's movements.
Sunroof (optional) prevention system is fitted. Before and There are 6 positions to open the
The sunroof is electrically controlled during the sunroof operation, always sliding roof lengthways and 3 three
and can only be operated with the make sure that passengers are not positions for the tilted opening.
ignition key in the MAR position. It can exposed to the risk of injuries caused When the selector switch position has
slide lengthways and be raised at the both by the moving roof and by been chosen, the sunroof moves until
rear (tilting). personal objects dragged or hit by the it stops automatically in the position
The sunroof is equipped with a finger- sunroof itself. When you exit the chosen.
trap prevention system that controls vehicle, always remove the ignition Upon opening the sunroof a front flap
lengthways sliding when the roof is key to avoid that the sunroof if rises automatically in order to deviate 3
being closed or tilted. If an obstacle operated inadvertently, becomes a the air flow.
interferes with the roof travel during danger for passengers remaining
the closing stage, the sunroof stops onboard. WARNING: If the guide needs to be
and reverses its travel a short way back. cleaned with solvents, the
WARNING: Do not open the sunroof if mechanisms, Bowden cables and
WARNING: In the event of rain, always there is ice on it: risk of damage. sliding parts, such as the water channel
close the sunroof to prevent water slide, must be then greased.
infiltrations from staining the fabric/
leather upholstery.

Internal outfits 87

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 88 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Front dome light Opening one or more doors, the front Rear dome light
The dome light includes a central light and rear dome lights will turn on for The dome light includes a central light
and two reading lights. The central approx. 3 minutes. If the door is closed and two reading lights. The central
light, which turns on automatically before this time has elapsed, the lights light, which turns on automatically
when one of the doors is opened and will switch off after about 10 seconds. when one of the doors is opened and
turns off following the door closing Upon removing the key from the turns off following the door closing
(timed switching off) may be switched switch and activating the centralised (timed switching off) may be switched
on manually by pressing button B. door lock with the remote control, the on manually by pressing button E.
The reading lights are controlled by dome lamps turn on for about 10 The reading lights are controlled by
the respective buttons C. seconds. the respective buttons F.
If they are turned on pressing the In the event of a collision causing the If they are turned on pressing the
3 button, both the central and reading inertia switch to turn on, the dome button, the reading light will remain
lights will remain on for about 15 lights switch on automatically for on for about 15 minutes after turning
minutes after turning the engine off, approx. 15 minutes. the engine off, and then will turn off.
and then will turn off. When the exterior lights are switched
When the exterior lights are switched on, the two night LEDs G come on.
on, the two night LEDs D come on.

D B D

C
G F E F G

88 Internal outfits

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 89 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Sun visors Clock Rear window sunshade


They can be folded to the front and to The clock is adjusted automatically by The electrical sun shade works with the
the side of the vehicle. To move the setting the time with the Multi Media ignition key in the MAR position.
visor to the sides, lower and release it System. The switch buttons are located both on
from the catch H. The clock lights up when the external the front and on the rear dashboard.
By lowering the visor on the lights are turned on.
passenger's side you can access the WARNING: Before activating the
courtesy mirror with incorporated sunshade, make sure that there are no
light; the latter switches on objects that may interfere with its
automatically (with the ignition key in travel.
the MAR position) raising the mirror
protective cover. Before raising the 3
visor, close the mirror cover.

Internal outfits 89

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 90 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Press button I to raise the sunshade Rear door sunshades (optional) Front ashtray and cigarette
and button J to lower it.
Housed on the rear doors, they roll up lighter
automatically. To pull out the They are found on the central console,
WARNING: If the sunshade guide hidden by a cover. To open the cover,
sunshade, pull on the grip K and latch
needs to be cleaned with solvents, it slide it forward.
it into the catches L located on the top
must then be greased in the area Pressing button M operates the
edge of the door.
where the sunshade slides using Teflon
cigarette lighter. After about 20
based grease.
seconds this returns automatically to
the initial position and is ready for use.
WARNING: If the sunshade is moved up
Remove the tray in order to clean the
and down at least 4 times within a time
ashtray.
3 period of 25 seconds, the system
deactivates for 30 seconds. Before
WARNING: Always make sure that the
deactivating the sunshade, the system
cigarette lighter has been switched off.
will complete the movement in
progress. The last movement
The cigarette lighter reaches
performed will be opposite to the
high temperatures. Handle it
starting movement.
carefully and do not allow
children to use it: risk of fire and
burns!

L
M
L
I J K

90 Internal outfits

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 91 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Rear ashtray Beverage holder on centre Glove compartment


It is located on the rear central console, console Positioned in the lower part of the
hidden by a cover. To open the cover, It is positioned behind the gearshift dashboard, on the passenger side, it
hold and pull it from the protruding lever. can be opened pressing button O. The
part. latter only works with the ignition key
Pressing button N fully down operates turned to MAR and for about 10
the cigarette lighter. After about 20 minutes after having extracted the key
seconds this returns automatically to or rotated it to the STOP position.
the initial position and is ready for use. The compartment is lit by a courtesy
Remove the tray in order to clean the light when it is open.
ashtray.
To ensure passenger safety, 3
the compartment must always
remain closed while driving.
If the button controlled opening is
faulty, the compartment can be
opened by pulling the emergency
cable behind the compartment itself.
WARNING: Do not place objects
weighing over 10 kg (22 lb) in the
glove compartment.

Internal outfits 91

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 92 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Glove box Beverage cooler Map pockets


The left-hand side of the dashboard The front armrest houses a lit beverage The front seats are fitted with map
houses a tilting glove box. holder into which air is conveyed pockets located on the rear of the
To open it, raise the handle P. directly from the air conditioning seatbacks.
To close it, push it into its seat until it system.
locks. To access the compartment, pull the WARNING: Do not put heavy or sharp
armrest holding it from the handgrip. objects in the map pockets.
To ensure driver safety, the To activate the air-conditioning/
compartment must always ventilation inside the compartment,
remain closed while driving. move control Q upwards. To stop it,
lower back the control.
3
WARNING: The temperature of the air
inside the beverage cooler is the same
that as that coming out from the air
conditioning/heating vents, it
therefore depends on the temperature
set via the relative control panel.

92 Internal outfits

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 93 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Handholds Tables (optional) WARNING: As the table is not


equipped with holding devices, do not
Usually laying in a horizontal position, They are installed on the back of the
place open drinks containers on the
the handhold R can rotate until front seats.
tables during the journey, as the
reaching a vertical position. A return Opening: lift the table T until the
surrounding upholstery could be
spring automatically repositions the supporting mechanism clicks in place.
stained or damaged if they fall over.
handhold in the horizontal position.
The rear handholds also include a cloth When one or more tables are
Closing: press the support bracket U to
hook, S. open, passengers travelling in
release the mechanism and then lower
the rear seats must fasten
the table T.
their seat belts as indicated on the
table.
When you are not using the 3
table T, you should close it to
When travelling with one or
prevent passengers sitting in
more child seats fitted on the
the rear seats from being hit by its
rear seat of the vehicle, the
edges and corners.
tables must be in the closed position.

When closing the table always


guide it down: risk of
crushing.

U
S R

Internal outfits 93

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 94 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

HomeLink (optional) Customer Service General information


This system allows you to control If you have any problems with While programming HomeLink, it is
automatic gate and garage door configuring and programming the advisable to disconnect the drive
opening devices, as well as lighting or HomeLink system or if you would like motor of the gate/door to be remote-
alarm systems from inside the vehicle. to know what devices can be controlled, since the numerous driving
It is programmable directly on the connected to it, call the toll-free pulses launched for this operation
transmitting station by means of the number 008000 466 345 65 or visit the might damage it.
original remote controls for the Web site ww.eurohomelink.com . If the battery fails or is disconnected,
devices to be controlled, and is the stored settings are not deleted.
Safety Precautions If the gate/door was manufactured
compatible with the existing systems.
For using the HomeLink feature, prior to 1982 (not equipped with
The control and programming panel is
3 composed of three buttons: M, N, O
follow the instructions and safety safety systems or automatic stop in the
indications given in the User Manual event of an obstacle in the range of
and a LED P.
that the manufacturer must provide action), the gate/door cannot be
together with the device to be controlled by HomeLink.
controlled. If you do not have this For more information in this regard,
manual, request it from the supplier. please contact the Customer Service.
Before opening or closing a gate or
door make sure that the procedure can
be performed in thorough safety, i.e.
make sure that you can see the whole
range of action of the gate or door and
also check that there are no persons,
animals or other objects within this
P range.

M N O

94 Internal outfits

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 95 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Configuration according to the “Countries of Operation” table


country of use
The system is normally set to the No. of LED
Mode Countries covered
operating mode for the country where flashes
the vehicle is sold.
1 Rest of Europe A, B, CZ, CY, DK, FIN, D, GBZ, GR, H, IRL,
Procedure for selecting the country of
IS, L, M, NL, N PL, DOM, P, SK, E, S, CH,
operation:
FL, ZA, UAE, RCH, EST, LT, SLO, RUS, LV
1) Press and hold buttons M and O;
2) after approx. 20 seconds the LED P 2 France F, KWT, MC
starts flashing, indicating that all
3 United Kingdom GB, KWT, SA
the three programmable channels
have been reset 4 Italy I, AUS, HKJ, AND
3
3) Hold down buttons M and O until
the LED goes off (about 10 seconds) Programming To program the other buttons, repeat
then release the buttons the operations skipping the first three
– press and hold buttons M and O;
4) press buttons M and O again. steps.
– after about 20 seconds, the LED P
5) After one second, press button N; starts flashing;
when it is released, the LED P starts Use
– release the buttons – When the signal of the device to be
flashing; the number of flashes
shows the operating mode for the – hold the remote control for the activated reaches its operating
country (see the table “Countries of device to be controlled close to the range, press the dedicated Home
Operation”) HomeLink control panel (0-30 cm) Link button
6) Press button N when reaching the – simultaneously press and hold the – The LED P remains on while the
number of flashes corresponding to button on the hand-held remote signal is being transmitted.
the relative country. control and one of the three
HomeLink buttons M, N or O; The devices controlled through the
At the end of the flashing cycle (4
flashes), the flashing sequence restarts – if the programming procedure has HomeLink function can always be
from scratch. been successfully completed, the LED activated using the original remote
P will flash faster; controls.
– release the buttons.

Internal outfits 95

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 96 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Should the so programmed HomeLink Programming devices controlled by Reprogramming an individual


not activate the system to be alternate code button
controlled, this may be due to the fact – Locate the specific setting button by If you wish to program activation of a
that this system is controlled by a consulting the user manual of the new system on an already used
remote control with an alternate code. system to be controlled. This button HomeLink button, proceed as follows:
is normally located on the motor – press and hold the HomeLink button
An alternate activation code can be which drives the device. selected
recognised in the following ways: – Press the button and, in normal – after about 20 seconds, the LED P
– Consulting the instruction manual conditions, a LED will illuminate. starts flashing; hold the button
provided with the device to be down
controlled. WARNING: Normally, after this
– hold the original remote control of
3 – Despite the fact that the HomeLink operation you have 30 seconds to start
the device to be controlled close to
programming procedure has been the next one.
the HomeLink control panel (0-30
carried out correctly, the HomeLink – Briefly press the HomeLink button cm)
function does not activate the you have chosen to control the
– press and hold the button on the
device. device;
original remote control
– Holding the dedicated HomeLink – press it a second time; when it is
– if the programming procedure has
button pressed down, the LED released the operation should be
been successfully completed, the LED
briefly flashes fast and then remains completed. For some types of
P will flash faster;
on for 2 seconds; this sequence is motors, the button might have to be
repeated for about 20 seconds. pressed a third time. – release both buttons.
The system previously programmed on
Home Link has thus been replaced with
the new programming and is ready to
be used.
This operation has no impact on the
other HomeLink buttons.

96 Internal outfits

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 97 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Deleting the programmed buttons


Unlike programming, which is
performed for each individual button,
all three buttons are deleted
simultaneously.
To delete proceed as follows:
– press and hold buttons M and O;
– after about 20 seconds, the LED P
starts flashing
– release the buttons.

WARNING: It is advisable to carry out


3
the Home Link deletion procedure
when selling the vehicle.

Internal outfits 97

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap4_FOTO_ing.fm Page 98 Friday, May 30, 2008 2:44 PM

98

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap4_FOTO_ing.fm Page 99 Friday, May 30, 2008 2:44 PM

Before you drive

Doors 100
Power windows 104
Engine compartment lid 106
Luggage compartment 107
Fuel tank flap 108
Keys 109
Ignition switch 112
Electronic alarm system 113 4
Front seats 117
Rear seats 121
Rear-view mirrors 124
Steering wheel 126
External lights and direction indicators 127
Windscreen wiper/washer and headlight washers 131
Maserati Multi Media System 133
Air conditioning and heating system 141
Bose® Surround Sound 148

99

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 100 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Doors and rear doors. Otherwise, if the doors When the alarm system is switched on
are locked, you must release them by and the doors are locked, the LEDs on
turning the key in the lock to open the doors flash.
Before opening a door, ensure
them, then press button D. The remote control allows you to
the manoeuvre can be
On the front door panels, in a position operate the centralised opening of all
performed safely.
which is visible from the outside, there the doors or only the driver’s door
is a dual-colour (green/red) LED E depending on the setting in the Multi
Opening doors from the outside which indicates the locks’ status Media System.
Switch off the alarm and the (locked/unlocked). The red LED lights If, when the doors are closed from
centralised locking system by pressing up for 3 seconds after the locks are outside, one or more of the doors and/
button A on the radio control (see engaged and the green LED for the or the luggage compartment lid are
charter “Electronic alarm system”, same amount of time when they are not properly closed, the direction
page 113) or insert and turn the key in released. indicators flash quickly for a few
the lock on one of the front doors. To seconds.
4 open the door, press button C on the WARNING: The door LEDs remain lit
inside of each handle. for approximately 3 seconds and WARNING: The internal door lock/
The vehicle is equipped with power therefore, in normal conditions, the unlock buttons are disabled when the
locks which move the mechanical parts LEDs are switched off. doors are locked from the outside.
during door-opening manoeuvres.In
the event of an emergency (e.g., dead WARNING: In the event that the inertia
battery or electric system failure) to switch trips, the doors are electrically
open the doors when the locks are unlocked and the vehicle can be
released, press button D for the front accessed by pressing button D.

D C
A E

100 Doors

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 101 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Opening from the inside Doors open warning lights Rear door internal locking device
To open the door, even if the lock is If the doors and the engine/luggage (child safety device)
engaged, pull the internal handle F. compartment lids are not closed This device is used to prevent the rear
There are two buttons on the front properly, this is signalled by the doors from being opened from the
and rear central dashboards which relative warning lights on the inside.
operate the door lock engage and instrument panel display switching on, It is activated/deactivated by turning
release functions: accompanied by the messages “Door (using the tip of the ignition key) the
G – engaging the locks open” or “Doors open”. device J to position:
H – releasing the locks. 1) device deactivated (unlocked)
WARNING: By pulling the internal 2) device activated (locked)
handle on the driver’s door, all the
locks can be released at the same time WARNING: Once the child safety lock
or just the driver’s door, depending on has been activated, always remove the
how the Multi Media System settings. key to prevent damaging it in the 4
event of accidental closing of the door.

The child safety lock is activated


separately for the two rear doors.

G
F 1
G H
H 2
J

b b l f
Doors 101

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 102 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

In the event of activation of Automatic door locking over Door release in the event of an
the inertia switch, the doors 20 km/H accident
are electrically unlocked; if the Using the Multi Media System the In the event of a collision with
child safety lock is enabled, the rear doors, engine and luggage activation of the inertia switch, the
doors can only be opened from the compartment lids and fuel tank flap door locks can be automatically
outside. can be set to lock automatically when released to allow rescuers to access the
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 20 km/h passenger compartment from outside.
The child safety device remains (12 mph).
enabled even when the central door For activating/deactivating this If the centralised locking has
locking is activated. function, please consult the “Multi been activated from the inside
Media System” manual. and, following a collision, the
WARNING: With the doors locked and inertia switch was unable to activate
the child safety lock enabled, if the WARNING: If you need to have the the door release function due to loss
battery is flat or malfunctions, the rear vehicle tested on a roller bench with of the battery or damage to it, it will
4 doors remain locked both from the nobody onboard, you must verify, not be possible to access the
inside and the outside. through the vehicle set-up menu, that passenger compartment from outside.
the automatic door locking feature - However, whether the doors can be
Always use this device when that is activated upon exceeding 20 opened or not depends on the
carrying children, to prevent Km/h is disabled, or that a window is condition they are in and, in fact, if a
them opening the doors while open, or that you have ad additional door is bent it may be impossible to
the vehicle is moving. key left out of the vehicle. open it, even if the lock is not
engaged. In this case, attempt to open
the other doors.

102 Doors

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 103 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Door lock ECU initialisation Underdoor courtesy light


Every time the battery is connected or Each door panel is fitted, on the lower
a fuse replaced, to restore correct side, with a courtesy light L to
operation, the system initialisation illuminate the area where passengers
procedure must be performed. This enter/exit the vehicle.
consists in a door lock/release cycle
effected using the door remote Gearshifting is always active
control. and may be performed even
when one or more doors, the
Door open indicator engine compartment lid or the
Each door is provided with a reflector luggage compartment lid are open.
K fitted on the lower side of the door Therefore, in these conditions, take
panel. great care to avoid moving the
gearshift lever and so accidentally
engage gears. 4

Doors 103

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 104 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Power windows Improper use of the sunroof Operation in manual and


can however be dangerous, automatic modes
even if the vehicle is equipped The front and rear power windows can
Finger-trap prevention device with the finger-trap prevention be operated both automatically
Thanks to the anti-trapping strips, the system. Before and during activation (opening and closing) and manually.
system is capable of detecting the of the power window, always check The operation mode is selected
presence of an obstacle, during the that the passengers are not exposed according to the length of the power
window’s upwards stroke, to the risk of injury both by the window’s operation impulse.
consequently interrupting the moving window and by personal If the button is kept pressed down or
upwards travel and reversing it objects that could be dragged or hit by pulled up, the automatic operation is
immediately. it. When getting out the vehicle, activated, upwards or downwards,
If the finger-trap prevention function always remove the ignition key to respectively. The window stops when it
is activated 5 times within a minute, prevent the windows being reaches the stroke end or if the button
the system automatically enters the accidentally activated, posing a risk to is pushed again.
4 “recovery” mode, which is indicated by passengers remaining onboard. A short impulse causes a small
the window moving upwards in a
movement of the window, which stops
jogging motion. To restore normal
when the button is released.
operation, press the control once
again or turn the key to the STOP
position and subsequently to the MAR
position.
If there are no system malfunctions the
window operation will return to
normal. If this is not the case, contact
the Maserati Service Network.
When the system detects a fault, the
“ ” symbol appears on the
instrument panel display, accompanied
by a failure message.
It can only be operated with the
ignition key in the MAR position.

104 Power windows

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 105 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Controls Centralised windows and To activate the centralised windows


The armrest on the driver’s door is sunroof closing/opening and sunroof opening, keep button F
equipped with the controls for The centralised windows and sunroof on the remote control pressed down
operating all of the power windows, closing/opening can be activated in the for over 2 seconds after the doors have
while the other door panels are only following conditions: been opened; the power windows and
equipped with the control for - ignition key removed sunroof move automatically until fully
operating the relative window. - all doors properly closed. open or until the button is released.
A - Front left-hand window opening/ To activate the centralised windows
and sunroof closing, keep button G on WARNING: Before activating the alarm
closing
the remote control pressed down for system, check that all the windows and
B - Front right-hand window opening/ the sunroof are closed to prevent the
over 2 seconds after the doors have
closing alarm being inadvertently triggered.
been closed. The power windows and
C - Rear left-hand window opening/ sunroof move automatically until fully
closing closed or until the button is released. Improper use of the power
D - Rear right-hand window operning/ windows and of the sunroof 4
closing WARNING: Before leaving the vehicle, can however be dangerous,
it is advisable to check the windows are even if the finger-trap prevention
E - Deactivation/activation of power
completely closed. system is fitted. Before and during the
window controls on the rear doors.
sunroof operation, always make sure
The controls are disabled when the
that passengers are not exposed to
LED on the button is illuminated.
the risk of injuries caused both by the
moving windows and the roof and by
personal objects dragged or hit by the
sunroof and the windows themselves.
When getting out the vehicle, always
F G remove the ignition key to prevent the
E C A windows being accidentally activated,
posing a risk to passengers remaining
onboard.

D B
Power windows 105

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 106 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Engine compartment lid To close the lid: lower it to about 20 cm


(8 in) from the engine compartment
and let it drop; it will close
To open the engine compartment lid:
automatically.
pull lever A located on the lower left-
hand side of the dashboard.
Always check that the engine
compartment lid is properly
Disengage the safety device by lifting closed, to prevent it from
lever B shown in the figure. opening while travelling.
Lift the lid: this operation is facilitated
by two gas struts. Gearshifting is always active
The lid positions itself at the maximum and may be performed even
opening position and does not require when one or more doors, the
support stays. engine compartment lid or the
4 luggage compartment lid are open.
Therefore, in these conditions, take
great care to avoid moving the
gearshift lever and so accidentally
engage gears.

106 Engine compartment lid

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 107 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Luggage compartment may be unlocked also using the door When using the luggage
unlock control C, see page 83 of the compartment, never exceed
Multi Media System manual. the maximum loads allowed
The luggage compartment lid can be
If the lock is released, to open the (see section on “Capacities and
opened from the inside or outside of Technical Specifications”). Also check
luggage compartment lid simply press
the vehicle. Button A, used to open the that the objects contained in the
the button under the number plate
lid from inside the passenger luggage compartment are arranged
lights fixing mount.
compartment, is located on the left of properly.
To prevent the controls being operated
the steering wheel; operation is only
accidentally while the vehicle is The luggage compartment is
possible with the ignition key removed
travelling, the luggage compartment illuminated by a dome light that comes
or in the STOP and ACC position.
can only be opened when the ignition on automatically when the lid is
To open the luggage compartment lid
key is removed on or in the STOP and opened; switching off is timed.
from the outside, press button B on the
ACC position. If the luggage compartment lid is left
ignition key or insert the key in the
Raising the lid is facilitated by the open, the light switches off after a few
lock on the luggage compartment lid
and turn it anticlockwise, thus
action of the gas struts. The struts are minutes. To switch it on again, close 4
calibrated to guarantee proper the lid and then re-open it.
mechanically releasing the lock. This
operation with the weights specified WARNING: If the luggage
mechanical procedure does not inhibit
by the manufacturer. Arbitrary compartment lid is opened
any subsequent electric opening
additions of objects (spoilers, parcel mechanically (i.e. by inserting and then
request, whether coming from button
racks, etc.) can jeopardise proper turning the key in the lock) the power
A or B.
operation and safety in the use of the locking will be disabled. When the lid
Depending on the Multi Media System
luggage compartment lid. is reopened electrically, normal
settings, the luggage compartment
operation will be restored.

C
B

Luggage compartment 107

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 108 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Fuel tank flap The cap is linked to the filler neck with Fuel tank flap emergency
a strap, so that it cannot be misplaced opening
while refuelling. If necessary, the flap can be opened by
The fuel tank flap is found on the rear,
The flap must be re-closed manually. pulling the small cable C located on the
left-hand side of the vehicle. To open
Before closing the flap, check that the right-hand side of the luggage
the flap, press button A located on the
fuel filler cap is fully tightened. compartment.
left of the steering wheel.
It can be operated only when the
Do not bring naked flames or
ignition key is removed or turned to
lit cigarettes close to the filler:
STOP.
risk of fire!
The cap’s hermetic seal may result in a
slight pressure increase in the tank. Also avoid putting your face close to
Any hissing noise whilst the cap is the filler neck so as not to inhale
being released is therefore completely noxious fumes.
normal.
4 When refuelling, the cap must remain
attached to the flap by means of the
respective hook B.

B
C
A

108 Fuel tank flap

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 109 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Keys The key can be used for: 2) If the CODE warning light stays
– start-up; on and the EOBD one goes off
after four seconds and then comes on
The Maserati CODE system – door central locking;
again immediately, the code is not
In order to increase protection against – activating/deactivating the recognised. If this occurs, turn the key
attempts at theft, the vehicle is passenger's airbag (European to STOP and then back to MAR. If the
equipped with an electronic engine version only); immobilizer stays on, try with the
immobilizer system (Maserati CODE), – electrical and manual opening of the other keys. If you still cannot start the
which is automatically activated when luggage compartment; engine, try the emergency start
the ignition key is removed. – activating/deactivating the alarm procedure and contact the Maserati
Each ignition key contains an system. Service Network.
electronic device which transmits a
code signal to the Maserati CODE Operation
control unit, and engine ignition is
Each time the ignition key is removed
enabled only if the key code is 4
the from the STOP position, the
recognised by the system.
protection system will activate the
Two keys are supplied with the vehicle.
engine immobilizer.
When the key is turned to MAR , upon
engine start-up:
1) If the code is acknowledged, the
warning light CODE on the
instrument panel will off within a
second, while the EOBD warning
light, once the ECU diagnosis cycle has
been completed, will switch off after
about four seconds. Under these
conditions, the protection system
recognizes the key code and
deactivates the engine immobilizer.
Turn the key to AVV to start the
engine.

Keys 109

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 110 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

While driving, with the ignition key in Duplicating the keys Emergency starting
the MAR position: When ordering additional keys, If the MASERATI CODE fails to
1) If the CODE warning light remember that memorising (up to deactivate the engine immobilizer, the
comes on, it means that the system maximum of 7 keys) must be carried LEDs CODE will light up with a
is running a self-diagnosis cycle. At out on all the keys, including those fixed light, the LED EOBD will go
the first stop, you can test the already in your possession. Contact the out after four seconds and then will
system: turn the ignition key to Maserati Service Network directly, come on immediately: the engine will
STOP to stop the engine and then bringing with you all the keys in your not start. The engine can only be
back to MAR. The warning light possession, the Maserati CODE system started with the emergency procedure.
CODE will come on and should CODE CARD, the electronic alarm
go out in approximately one system CODE CARD, a personal ID and WARNING: We recommended that you
second. If the warning light stays the identification and registration read the whole procedure through
on, repeat the procedure described documents proving ownership of the carefully before carrying it out. If you
previously leaving the key at STOP vehicle. The codes of any keys that are make a mistake, you should turn the
4 for more that 30 seconds. If the fault not available when the new storage ignition key to STOP and repeat the
persists, contact the Maserati procedure is carried out will be deleted operations from step 1.
Service Network. from the memory to prevent any lost
2) If the CODE warning light or stolen keys being used to start the
flashes, it means that the vehicle is vehicle.
not protected by the immobilizer
device. Contact the Maserati Service
Network immediately to have the
codes of all the keys stored in the
memory.

WARNING: Strong impact can damage


the electronic components in the key.

WARNING: Each key supplied has its


own specific code, which must be
stored in the memory of the system
control unit.

110 Keys

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 111 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

1) Read the 5-digit electronic code on 5) The EOBD warning light starts If the EOBD warning light remains
the CODE CARD. flashing again. As soon as the on, turn the key to STOP and repeat
2) Turn the ignition key to MAR: the displayed number of flashing is the procedure from step 1.
CODE and EOBD warning equal to the second digit of your This procedure can be repeated an
lights are on. CODE CARD, press down the unlimited number of times.
accelerator pedal and keep it
3) Press the accelerator pedal fully
pressed. WARNING: After an emergency start-
down and keep it pressed.
6) Proceed in the same manner for the up, you should contact the Maserati
Approximately 8 seconds later, the
remaining digits in the code on the Service Network, otherwise you will
EOBD warning light will go off.
CODE CARD. have to perform the emergency start
Release the accelerator and get
procedure every time the engine is
ready to count the number of times 7) When the last digit has been
started.
the EOBD warning light flashes. entered, keep the accelerator pedal
4) As soon as the displayed number of pressed down. The EOBD
flashing is equal to the first digit of warning light comes on for 4
your CODE CARD, depress the seconds and then goes off; you can 4
accelerator and keep it pressed now release the accelerator pedal.
down until the EOBD warning 8) A quick flashing of the EOBD
light goes off, after being lit on for LED (about 4 seconds) confirms that
approximately 4 seconds; you can the operation has been carried out
now release the accelerator pedal. correctly.
9) Start the engine turning the key
from MAR to AVV.

Keys 111

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 112 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Ignition switch When you get out of the In the event of tampering
vehicle, always remove the with the ignition switch (e.g.
key to avoid activating the attempted theft), have it
The starter switch can be turned to in 4
controls. checked by the Maserati Service
positions: Network before continuing travelling.
STOP - Engine off, engine immobiliser WARNING: The ignition key can only
and steering lock activated, connected be removed from the switch when the If the automatic electric
devices cut-off, except those that are gearshift lever is in position P. In parking brake engagement
not operated by the key (e.g. door addition, it must be removed within 30 function is deactivated,
lock, luggage compartment opening seconds after turning the key to STOP. remember to engage the parking
control, etc.). The key can be removed. If you do not remove the key within 30 brake manually.
ACC - Cigarette lighter and power seconds, you will need to turn it back
sockets. The key cannot be removed. to MAR and then to STOP to obtain a Never leave children
MAR - Driving position. All electrical further 30 seconds within which to unattended in the vehicle.
devices can operate.
4 AVV - Engine start-up.
remove the key. In the event that the
key unlocking system fails or if it is not
possible to shift the gearshift lever to P,
to remove the key you must turn it to
STOP, then remove the cap A, using a
pen or sufficiently pointed tool, then
press the button just uncovered and at
the same time extract the key. Once
the key has been removed, refit the
cap A.

After stopping the vehicle,


STOP ACC always shift the gearshift
MAR lever to P.
AVV

112 Ignition switch

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 113 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Electronic alarm system Activation The alarm system becomes operative


To turn on the electronic alarm system, after approximately 25 seconds and
press button A on the key: the alarm is activated if:
The electronic alarm system performs
the following functions: – the direction indicators will flash – a door is opened
– remote centralised door locking/ once; – the luggage compartment lid is
unlocking – the system beeps; opened
– perimeter surveillance, detecting the – the red LEDs on the front door – the engine compartment lid is
opening of doors, front and rear lids panels flash; opened
– motion surveillance, detecting – the vehicle's centralized door locking – someone attempts to enter the
intrusion in the passenger system is activated and locks the vehicle from a window
compartment doors. – the power supply is off
– vehicle movement surveillance. – the siren is disconnected
– the car moves.
WARNING: The engine immobilizer 4
operation is guaranteed by the When the alarm is switched on, the
Maserati CODE system, which is
user may request the luggage
automatically activated when the
compartment opening; in this case, the
ignition key is removed from the
motion sensors and inclination sensors
starter switch.
are temporarily deactivated.
If the luggage compartment is then
closed, the sensors will be reactivated.

Electronic alarm system 113

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 114 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Should the direction indicators flash 9 Deactivation Getting into the vehicle when
times when you activate the alarm To switch the electronic car alarm off, the alarm system is on
system, this means that one of the press button B on the key: When the remote control battery is
doors or lids is not perfectly closed and flat, to access the vehicle you must
– the direction indicators flash twice;
therefore is not protected by the insert the key in the lock on one of the
perimeter surveillance. Check for – the system gives a double beep;
two front doors and turn it clockwise
correct closing of doors, rear/front lid – the red LEDs on the front door
to release it: the alarm will sound but
and close the open one, even without panels switch off;
you will have to continue with the
deactivating the alarm system: the – the centralized door lock system is normal starting procedure regardless.
direction indicators flashing once activated and the doors are The alarm will switch off.
indicate that now the door, front/rear unlocked.
lids are closed properly and are The alarm system is off and it is
protected by the perimeter therefore possible to get into the
surveillance. vehicle and to start the engine.
4 Pressing button B twice unlocks the
WARNING: If the direction indicators doors and also switches on the low
flash 9 times when the alarm system is beams for 30 seconds.
activated with doors, front and rear
lids properly closed, it means that the WARNING: The alarm system is not
self-diagnosis function has detected a deactivated when the key is turned in
malfunction in the system and that the locks.
you should contact the Maserati
Service Network to have the system
checked.

114 Electronic alarm system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 115 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Deactivating the motion sensing Alarm memory Ordering extra radio operated
alarm If the warning light appears on controls
The motion sensing system can be the display when the vehicle is started, To order extra radio operated control
deactivated by pressing button C in the this means that an intrusion has been keys, contact the Maserati Service
roof. When this function is attempted during your absence. Network only and remember to take
deactivated, the LED on the button will with you:
flash for 3 seconds and then turn off. The alarm system memory is reset – all the keys in your possession with
when you turn the ignition key. related remote control
Deactivating the anti-lift alarm – the Maserati CODE system's CODE
Pressing button D deactivates the lift Ministerial homologation CARD
protection alarm. When this function is The electronic alarm system is
– the electronic alarm system's CODE
deactivated, the LED on the button will compliant with the current legislation
CARD
flash for 3 seconds and then turn off. covering radio frequencies in each
Country. – your identity card
The homologation number can be – the identification and registration 4
found at the end of this manual, documents proving ownership of the
before the table of contents. vehicle.
For those markets that require the
transmitter and/or receiver marking,
the approval number is found on the
component.

D C

Electronic alarm system 115

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 116 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

WARNING: Radio-operated controls Replacing radio operated control To replace the remote control battery:
that are not delivered for the new batteries – extract the key fitting by pressing
code storing procedure will be If, when one of the three buttons is button E
automatically deactivated in order to pressed, the corresponding function – undo the screw F
prevent any lost or stolen radio- does not activate, replace the remote
operated controls from being used to – remove the battery support G
control battery after checking the
deactivate the electronic alarm system. operation of the alarm system – extract the battery H from its
functions with the other remote retaining ring
control. – fit a new battery of the same type,
observing the indicated polarity
– fit the battery support G into the
remote control and secure it by
tightening the screw F.

F
H
116 Electronic alarm system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 117 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Front seats Back/forwards adjustment Seatback rake adjustment


Push lever A on the outer side of the Push lever B forwards or backwards to
Never adjust the seat while seat forward or back. raise or lower the backrest.
driving. You could lose control
of the vehicle. Moving the Height adjustment Adjusting the headrest
seat could distract you or make you Grip lever A at the centre and push it Move the lever B up or down to align
press a pedal unintentionally. Adjust down or up. the upper edge of the headrest with
the driver's seat only when the vehicle the top of the occupant’s head.
is stationary. Seat inclination adjustment
(tilting) Lumbar support adjustment
The seats can only be adjusted with the – Front part of seat: push the front end Push the horizontal arrows on the
ignition key in the MAR position. of lever A up or down. lever C to increase or decrease lumbar
It is however possible, when the door is – Rear part of seat: push the rear end support and the vertical arrows to raise
closed, to operate the seat for approx. of lever A up or down. or lower it.
15 seconds after turning the ignition 4
key to STOP and then for other 15
seconds after the last operation.

A B C
Front seats 117

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 118 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Comfort Pack (optional) Also, using wheel button J the The Comfort screen page related to
This includes the installation of the intensity of the heating can be set at 3 the modified feature will be displayed
following systems inside the seats: levels. whenever you operate any control.

Ventilation system Massage System The seat comfort screen page can be
This can be activated and deactivated This function is activated by pressing displayed on the instrument panel by
by rotating wheel button H. By means the corresponding button K and, by pressing the MODE button. This screen
of two fans (one in the cushion and means of a system of inflatable and page shows the operating status of
one in the seat back), this system deflatable bags enclosed in the each individual system.
provides ventilation for the thigh and cushion and seat back, it provides a
back areas. massage function in the thigh and WARNING: Switch off the various
Still using the wheel button H, the lumbar region areas. The function can systems when not required, to prevent
intensity of the ventilation can be set be switched off by pressing button K power wastage.
at 3 levels. again.
4 The massage cycle lasts 5 minutes in Winter Pack (optional)
Heating system total, after which the function cuts out With this type of equipment, the
The heating is switched on by rotating and the previous settings are restored. heating system is installed in the front
wheel button J. Two heating pads are seats only.
used to heat the seat. When this Self-adaptive system
function is active for one or more seats, The system is activated by pressing
the relative warning light will light up button L and it enables the seats to
on the display. adapt themselves to the occupant's
body, thanks to the inflatable bags.
If the button is pressed a second time,
H J the system is deactivated.

Each system is independent of the


K M
others and can be operated separately
using specific buttons for each seat.

L
118 Front seats

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 119 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Storing the seats' and external The memorisation of a new seat Headrest
rear-view mirrors' positions position cancels the one previously The headrests are adjusted electrically
The system allows different positions memorised with that particular for the height and manually for the
to be stored and recalled for the button. tilting position.
driver's seat and for the external rear- To recall one of the stored positions
view mirrors (buttons M). with the door open, press the relative Remember that the headrests
Memorisation is only possible with the button “1”, “2” or “3” briefly. must be positioned so that
ignition key in position MAR. Adjust To recall the a stored position with the their upper edge is aligned
the position of the seat, the headrest, door closed, press the corresponding with the top of the occupant’s head.
the external rear-view mirrors and the button until hearing a tone that In fact, only in this position can they
steering wheel, then engage the confirms the seat has stopped. provide the support required in the
reverse gear and position the event of a bumper-to-tail collision.
passenger external mirror again to WARNING: To stop the seat, press one
ensure the best possible visibility to of the buttons - “1”, “2” or “3” -, or To adjust the headrests’ vertical
perform the manoeuvre, then one of the adjustment controls. position, move the lever B upwards or 4
disengage the reverse gear. Next press downwards.
one of the three buttons "1", "2" or WARNING: Malfunctioning of the seat
"3", each one corresponding to a control unit is indicated by a sequence
memorisable position, for 3 seconds of 5 tones emitted when the ignition
until you hear a double confirmation key is turned to position STOP: contact
tone. the Maserati Service Network to
Lumbar support adjustment is not remove the failure.
included in the seat position
memorisation.

Front seats 119

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 120 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Armrest Easy entry/exit system The function can be deactivated by


To access the compartment, lift the The easy entry/exit system helps the pressing button Q.
armrest P pulling on the handle O. To driver when stepping in and out of the Deactivation is signalled by the
close the compartment, lower the vehicle. Before the driver gets out, the illumination of the LED on the button.
armrest until the lock joint engages. seat moves back and the steering When the button is pressed a second
Inside the armrest there is a beverage wheel rises. time, the function is reactivated.
cooler. This function is activated when the
door is opened only if the ignition key
has been extracted or is in position
STOP.
On re-entry, the driver finds the seat
and steering wheel still in these
positions. After sitting down and
closing the door, upon turning the key
4 to position MAR, both the seat and the
steering wheel return to their normal
driving positions.

Q
b b l f
120 Front seats

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 121 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Rear seats Seat inclination adjustment (tilting) To access the compartment, lift the
This is possible for the side seats only, armrest cover using the handle C. The
and it is performed by pushing control compartment houses a control D to
These can seat 3 passengers.
A located on the door panel, next to move the front passenger seat forward
the seat you wish to adjust either and back. To close the compartment,
Rear seat adjustments (optional) lower the cover.
upwards or downwards.
Lengthways adjustment
This is possible for the side seats only, Armrest
and it is performed by pushing control The rear armrest is mobile and can be
A, located on the door panel, next to folded up into the seatback. To lower
the seat you wish to adjust either it, pull the handle, B. To close it, pull it
forwards or backwards. upwards then push it back into its
seating.
Inside the armrest there is a pocket-
change compartment containing a 12 4
volt power socket.

A B

Rear seats 121

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 122 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

There are two beverage holders Comfort Pack (optional) Ventilation system
housed in compartment D. To pull out This entails the installation of the By means of two fans (one in the
the compartment, press on its front. following systems and controls in the cushion and one in the seatback), this
If the comfort pack is installed, you will rear seats: system provides ventilation for the
find the relative controls inside the thigh and back areas. The relative
armrest on the rear seats. Massage System wheel button can also be used to
This system uses the inflatable bags adjust the intensity of the ventilation.
mechanism and operates in the thigh To switch on the ventilation, rotate
and lumbar region area. wheel button 3 (left-hand seat) or 6
The massage cycle lasts 5 minutes in (right-hand seat) to one of the
total, after which the function cuts out positions, either “1”, “2” or “3”,
and the previous settings are restored. depending on the air flow required. To
To activate the massage feature, press switch off the ventilation, rotate the
button 1 (left-hand seat) or 7 (right- wheel button to position “0”.
4 hand seat). If the button is pressed
again, the function is switched off.

2 9 8

D 0 0 0 0

1 4 3 6 5 7
122 Rear seats

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 123 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Heating system Comfort Pack Controls Headrests


Two heating pads are used to heat the The right-hand controls are used to The two side headrests can be both
seat. To switch on the heating, rotate adjust the right-hand seat, while the tilted and their height adjusted
wheel button 4 (left-hand seat) or 5 right-hand controls adjust the left- manually.
(right-hand seat) to one of the hand seat. The central, fixed headrest can be
positions, either “1”, “2” or “3”, 1 – 7 Massage activation/deactivation power tilted by pressing the specific
depending on the temperature 2 – 8 Lumbar support increase/ button to the left of the steering
required. To switch off the heating, decrease. wheel (see page 82) and repositioned
rotate the wheel button to position 3 – 6 Ventilation activation and by lifting it manually.
“0”. adjustment.
4 – 5 Heating activation and Remember that the headrests
Lumbar support adjustment control adjustment. must be positioned so that
The lumbar support adjustment allows 9 Front passenger seat backward/ their upper edge is aligned
the support offered by the seat back to forward movement. with the top of the occupant’s head.
be changed. Press the front of button 2 In fact, only in this position can they 4
(left-hand seat) or 8 (right-hand seat) Winter Pack (optional) provide the support required in the
to increase lumbar support. Press the event of a bumper-to-tail collision.
With this type of equipment, the
rear of the same buttons to decrease
heating system is installed in the rear
lumbar support.
seats only.
Control for front passenger seat
backward/forward movement
Press the front of button 9 to move the
front passenger seat forwards, and the
rear of the button to move it 2 9 8
backwards.

0 0 0 0

1 4 3 6 5 7
Rear seats 123

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 124 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Rear-view mirrors – Mirror retraction: By turning the The mirrors will yield in both directions
selector switch A to the lower central in the event of a collision.
position, both the mirrors fold
External rear-view mirrors inwards to facilitate parking in
They can be adjusted electrically (with narrow spaces. If the selector switch
the ignition key in the MAR position) is set back in the upper central
and they are equipped with anti-mist position, the mirrors return to the
resistors. open position.
– Mirror selection (right-hand or left-
hand): move the selector A to the
right or left, depending upon the
mirror you wish to adjust.
– Mirror positioning: control A allows
each mirror to be adjusted with four
4 movements (up – down – right – left).
Bring the selector back to the centre
to prevent mirror position being
changed involuntarily.

124 Rear-view mirrors

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 125 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

The external rear-view mirror position, The new position of the external rear- Electrochromic internal rear-
both for the normal driving direction view mirrors will be automatically view mirror
and for reversing, is automatically memorised together with the seat This can can be manually adjusted, and
memorised together with each seat position. is fitted with an accident-prevention
position. What is more, the mirror positions can release system that intervenes in the
To memorise a new position of the be adjusted for both the normal event of a collision.
external rear-view mirrors, turn the travelling direction and for reverse The electrochromic rear view mirror
ignition key to position MAR and manoeuvring. automatically operates an anti-dazzle
adjust the position of the mirrors; then function by gradually shading as the
engage the reverse gear and WARNING: Never retract or open the light shining on the mirror increases.
reposition the passenger external mirrors by hand to avoid damaging the This function is automatically
mirror to ensure the best possible powering mechanism. deactivated in reverse to ensure
visibility for manoeuvring, then maximum visibility of obstacles.
disengage the reverse gear. The mirrors must always be in
Finally, press one of the buttons “1”, the open position when the 4
“2” or “3” on the seat, each one vehicle is moving.
corresponding to a memorisable
position , until a beep confirms the Electrochromic external rear-
procedure is complete. view mirrors (optional)
The particular feature of these mirrors
is that they gradually darken as the
intensity of the light to which they are
exposed increases.

Rear-view mirrors 125

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 126 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Steering wheel Do not adjust the steering Easy entry/exit system


wheel while the vehicle is The easy entry/exit system makes it
moving. easier for the driver to get in and out
The steering wheel can be power
adjusted, both in terms of height and the vehicle. In fact, before the driver
depth. gets out, the seat moves back and the
It can only be adjusted if the ignition steering wheel rises.
key is in position MAR. The function is activated when the
For adjustment, move control A in the door is opened, only if the key has
four directions. been extracted or is in position STOP.
The steering wheel position is On re-entry, the driver finds the seat
memorised, together with the position and steering wheel still in these
of the external rear view mirrors, when positions. After sitting down and
the driver’s seat position is stored. closing the door, upon turning the key
to position MAR, both the seat and the
4 steering wheel return to their normal
driving positions.
Press button B to deactivate/activate
this function.

A
B
126 Steering wheel

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 127 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

External lights and Light switch Parking lights


Switch A has 5 settings: The parking lights work only with the
direction indicators 0 - DRL on (*) ignition key in the STOP or ACC
- Position and number plate lights positions, or with the key removed.
The external lights and direction on They are activated by turning the light
indicators switch on only with the - Low beams on switch to position .
ignition key in the MAR position, with - Parking lights It is harder to turn the switch to
the exception of the parking lights, AUTO - Automatic activation and position than to the other
which can be turned on at any time. deactivation of the external lights positions. This is to avoid activating the
The external lights can be switched on according to the brightness outside. parking lights unintentionally and
and off manually or automatically waste power.
according to the brightness of the light (*) On the vehicles manufactured for When the parking lights are on, the
outside. the Japanese market, these lights are warning light illuminates on the
not functioning; for all the other instrument panel.
markets where by law they may not be When the parking lights are on, if you 4
turned on, they can be deactivated lower the left-hand lever only the DRLs
through the Multi Media System. on the left-hand side are activated,
while when if you move the lever up
only the DRLs on the right-hand side
are activated.

External lights and direction indicators 127

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 128 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Automatic on and off WARNING: After the external lights Twilight sensor
When the light switch A is turned to have switched on automatically, the The twilight sensor is composed of two
MAR and the ignition key is in position front and rear fog lights can always be sensors: a global sensor, which
II, the position lights, low beam lights turned on manually. When the measures the brightness upwards, and
and number plate lights turn on and external lights are switched off a directional one, which measures the
off according to the brightness automatically, the front and rear fog brightness in the vehicle's travelling
outside. lights are also switched off (if active) direction, so as to recognise tunnels,
and the next time the external lights avenues and galleries.
WARNING: The high beams can only be are switched on automatically, only the If the sensor should fail, the system will
switched on manually by pushing the front fog lights will come on. switch on the low beams and the side
left-hand lever forwards. Therefore, the user will have to switch lights, regardless of the brightness of
the rear fog lights on manually if these light outside, and the failure message
If the low beams are are required. will appear on the instrument panel
activated, they will come on display.
4 automatically every time the The responsibility for
The failure indication will be displayed
lights are switched on. We recommend switching on the lights,
so long as the switch A is turned to
therefore that you switch them off depending on the daylight
AUTO.
every time the twilight sensor and the regulations in force in the
In this case, we recommend that you
deactivates the external lights. country of use, always lies with the
switch off the automatic operation for
driver. The automatic system for
the external lights and switch the
In case of fog during the day, switching on and off the external
latter on manually if necessary; contact
the position lights and low lights is to be considered as an aid for
the Maserati Service Network as soon
beams will not be turned on the driver. If necessary, switch the
as possible.
automatically. The driver must always lights on and off manually.
be ready to turn the lights on
manually, including the front and rear
fog lights.

128 External lights and direction indicators

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 129 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Direction indicators High beams Flashing the headlights


The lever has 3 settings: To switch on the high beams with the The headlights can be flashed by
B - Direction indicators off light switch in position 2, push the left pulling the left-hand lever towards the
C - Lever up: right-hand indicators hand lever towards the dashboard. steering wheel.
D - Lever down: left-hand indicators. Pull the lever towards the steering Flashing occurs also with lights off if
wheel again to switch off the high the ignition key is at MAR.
Lane change function beams and switch on the low beams.
This function allows you to activate WARNING: Flashing takes place with
either the right-hand or left-hand WARNING: For the use of the high the high beams. Keep to the
direction indicators so that they flash beams, follow the Road Regulations in regulations in force to avoid penalties.
three times, without moving the lever force.
to positions C or D, and then move it
back to the neutral position, B.
To activate this function, you must
simply start moving the lever to a 4
different position: if you move it up
you activate the right-hand direction
indicators, if you move it down you
activate the left-hand direction
indicators.
This function is useful when
overtaking or changing lanes.

External lights and direction indicators 129

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 130 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

“Follow me home” function When the function is active, every time


This feature allows you to set a timing the flash control is operated, the time
for the position lights and for the low the lights remain on is increased by 30
beams, so that they remain on, for a seconds, with a maximum total time of
certain period, after turning off the 210 seconds. The display will show the
vehicle. value of the time set.
This function is activated by pushing If the flash control is operated for over
the lever on the steering stalk, used to 2 seconds, the function is deactivated,
flash the headlights. The position and the indicator on the instrument
lights and low beams light up for 30 panel’s display switches off.
seconds, the message “follow me” When the function is active, returning
appears on the instrument panel the key to the MAR position
display for 20 seconds, and the lights’ deactivates the system.
activation time is displayed.
4

130 External lights and direction indicators

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 131 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Windscreen wiper/ Windscreen washer Headlight washers


Pulling the lever towards the steering The headlight washers are activated
washer and headlight wheel (non-permanent position) automatically when the windscreen
washers activates the windscreen washer and washer is started and the external
wiper. lights are on.
The windscreen wiper and washer When the windscreen washer is The headlight washer and windscreen
work only with the ignition key in the activated, the windscreen wiper starts washer share the same fluid reservoir,
MAR position. automatically. Releasing the lever cuts and a low fluid level is indicated by the
off the jet of fluid whilst the blades same warning light on the instrument
Windscreen wipers continue to wipe for a little while. panel.
The lever has 5-settings: The headlight washers are deactivated
A - Windscreen wiper stopped. WARNING: Do not start the windscreen if the vehicle’s speed exceeds
B - Automatic operation. In this washer during the cold months until 120 km/h (75 mph).
position the rain sensor's sensing the windscreen has warmed up. If it
range can be adjusted (lever at
has not warmed up, the liquid could 4
freeze on the glass and block the view.
first click stop).
C - Slow continuous operation (lever
WARNING: If there is ice or snow on
stopped on the second click).
the windscreen, do not activate the
D - Fast continuous operation (lever
windscreen wiper to prevent damage
stopped on the third click).
to the device.
E - Fast temporary operation (non-
permanent position).

E
A
B
C
D

Windscreen wiper/washer and headlight washers 131

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 132 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Rain sensor To regulate the frequency of Sensor failure


The function of the rain sensor is to intermittent operation, with the lever When the rain sensor is activated, in
adapt the frequency of the windscreen on the B position, rotate the end the event that it is malfunctioning, the
wiper’s strokes (in the intermittent section of the lever F. windscreen wiper is switched on in the
operation mode) to the intensity of the Rotating the end section clockwise, intermittent operation mode and the
rain. intermittent operation varies from a sensing range is set by the user,
All the other functions controlled by maximum (fast intermittent wipe) to a regardless of whether or not there is
the right-hand lever (windscreen minimum (slow intermittent wipe). rain on the windscreen.
wipers off, headlight and windscreen If the engine is turned off during In this case, we recommend that you
washer in continuous slow and fast automatic windscreen wiper cut-out the rain sensor and turn on the
operation mode and in temporary fast operation, with the lever in position B, wiper, if necessary, in continuous
operation mode) remain the same. to reactivate the function the next mode. Contact the Maserati Service
The rain sensor is activated time the engine is started, the lever Network as soon as possible.
automatically by bringing the right- must be moved to A (stop position)
4 hand lever to position B. The sensor's then returned to position B.
setting range varies progressively,
from the windscreen wiper's stationary Before cleaning the front
position - when the windscreen is dry - windscreen (for example in
to the windscreen wiper's second service stations) make sure
speed - in conditions of pouring rain. the rain sensor is deactivated or that
the key is turned to STOP. The rain
sensor must be cut-out also when
washing the car by hand or in
automatic car washes.

WARNING: In case of ice or snow on


the front windscreen, do not activate
the rain sensor to avoid damaging the
wiper motor.

132 Windscreen wiper/washer and headlight washers

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 133 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Maserati Multi Media The navigation system assists The system controls and main
the driver while driving, functions are listed below. The vehicle
System providing advice and is equipped with a specific annex to
suggestions, by means of voice the owner’s manual, describing the
The vehicle is equipped with the guidance and graphic information, for Maserati Multi Media System fully and
infotelematics Maserati Multi Media the best route to take for reaching the listing all of the warnings and
System, an advanced user interface set destination The suggestions precautions for use, which are
which combines innovative and provided by the navigation system do indispensable for safe use of the
exclusive technical features to provide not relieve the driver from full system. We advise you to read this
entertainment, navigation, responsibility for the manoeuvres annex carefully and thoroughly and to
communication and information made through traffic while driving, or keep it within reach at all times.
functions within a single system. In from compliance with road
addition, the Multi Media System regulations and other provisions
come equipped with Bose® Surround regarding road traffic.
Sound System, acoustically optimised The person driving the vehicle is 4
for this vehicle. always and in any case responsible for
safe driving on the road.

Maserati Multi Media System 133

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 134 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Controls
A - Display
B - Multi Media System Controls
C - Front automatic heating/air conditioning controls
D - Rear automatic heating/air conditioning controls (optional)

A D
4

134 Maserati Multi Media System

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 135 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

1) CD eject 8) Radio mode: radio frequency shift 10) Button pressed briefly
2) Mode selection: radio, CD or to the next station in preset steps, Radio mode: Automatic search for
Jukebox. starting from the station currently the next radio station.
3) Button pressed briefly tuned. CD, Jukebox and USB mode: go to
Radio mode: Frequency band CD, MP3, Jukebox and USB mode: next track.
selection: FM1 – FM2 – FMAST – previous album selection. Menu: scrolls through the menus.
AM. Menu: scrolls through the menus. Button pressed at length
Button pressed at length 9) With basic HI Fi system: CD audio mode: track fast forward
Radio mode: Automatic storage of Radio, CD, Jukebox and USB mode: 11) Button pressed briefly
radio stations in FMAST audio adjustment (music ambience, Radio mode: displays the list of
(Autostore). bass, treble, Fr-Rr balance, L-R stations receivable in alphabetical
4) Telephone mode activation. Balance, loudness, automatic order.
Send call. volume adjustment). CD audio mode: displays the list of
Accept incoming call. With Bose® Hi-Fi system (optional): tracks.
5) Activates the navigation message Radio, CD, Jukebox and USB mode: CD, MP3, Jukebox and USB mode: 4
repetition. audio adjustment (bass, treble, displays the list of albums and
6) CD insertion/compartment front-rear equalizer, LH-RH tracks.
7) Exits a selection list or goes to the equalizer, Center Point). Button pressed at length
previous menu level. Radio mode: updates the list of
stations

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
Maserati Multi Media System 135

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 136 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

12) Navigation, Audio (Radio, audio CD 14) Button pressed briefly 16) Button pressed briefly
and MP3, Jukebox) and Trip mode: Access to main menu Radio mode: recalls the stations
opens the function-related menu. Button pressed at length stored (1– 6)
Menu: turn to select the function, Access to Help menu. Telephone mode: dial phone
the item and the value, which are 15) Button pressed briefly number
then confirmed by pressing the Radio mode: Automatic search for (1 – 12) or enter text. Quick
knob itself. the previous radio station. selection of a name in the
13) Radio mode: radio frequency shift CD, Jukebox and USB mode: goes phonebook and on the SIM card
to the previous station in fixed to previous track if selected within that starts with the selected letter.
steps, starting from the station the first 3 seconds of track playing, Button pressed at length
currently tuned. otherwise the track is played again Storage of current station (1 – 6).
CD, MP3, Jukebox and USB mode: from the beginning. 17) Telephone mode: Reject incoming
next album selection. Menu: scrolls through the menus. call.
Menu: scrolls through the menus. Button pressed at length Drop call.
4 CD audio mode: track fast rewind

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

136 Maserati Multi Media System

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 137 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

18) Button pressed briefly 21) Change current display on the CD, Jukebox and USB mode: goes
TA (Traffic Announcements): right-hand side of the screen to previous track if selected within
activation of automatic reception (radio, map, onboard computer the first 3 seconds of track playing,
of traffic information. (TRIP), telephone). otherwise the track is played again
Button pressed at length 22) Increases the audio volume. from the beginning.
PTY (Type Program): Activation of 23) Decreases the audio volume. Button pressed at length
the search filter in relation to the 24) Button pressed briefly CD audio mode: track fast rewind
broadcasting station category. Radio mode: searches for the first 26) Mode selection: radio, CD or
Functions provided only in the tunable station with a higher Jukebox.
countries where the RDS is frequency 27) Mute function on/off.
available. CD, Jukebox and USB mode: next 28) Radio mode: radio frequency shift
MAP: for USA and Canada markets. track selection. to the next station in preset steps,
During navigation, it displays the Button pressed at length starting from the station currently
map. CD audio mode: track fast forward. tuned in.
19) With the key at MAR or the engine 25) Button pressed briefly CD, MP3, Jukebox and USB mode: 4
on: Audio OFF/ON Radio mode: searches for the first selects next folder.
With the key in position STOP or tunable station with a lower Menu: scrolls through the menus.
the gearshift lever in PARK: system frequency
activation / deactivation
Rotation: to adjust the volume.
20) Button pressed briefly
1st pulse: partial display darkening.
2nd pulse: total display darkening.
3rd pulse: back to normal display
brightness. 28 22 31 32 27 26 24 28
Button pressed at length
System reinitialisation.

30 30

29 23 25 29
Maserati Multi Media System 137

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 138 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

29) Radio mode: radio frequency shift 32) Button pressed briefly Radio
to the previous station in fixed Telephone mode activation. RADIO mode is activated by pressing
steps, starting from the station Send telephone call. the MODE button. If in
currently tuned in. Accept incoming call. “Configuration” mode the “Radio”
CD, MP3, Jukebox and USB mode: End telephone call in progress. option under “Info repetition on
selects the previous folder. Button pressed at length instrument panel” is activated, the
Menu: scrolls through the menus. Reject incoming telephone call. radio station selected or “SEARCH” is
30) Confirms the function, item or displayed on the instrument panel,
value selected. depending on the operation in
31) Activates/deactivates the voice progress.
control function. Press the button 30 or the knob 12 to
Navigator mode: Enables the access the main functions:
guiding voice during the trip – enter frequency
guidance and also displays – disable RDS frequency search
4 information pertaining to the – deactivate “Radio Text”.
guidance session.
CD, MP3 and Jukebox
The CD/MP3 and Jukebox modes are
activated by pressing the MODE
button. If in “Configuration” mode
the “Radio” option under “Info
repetition on instrument panel” is
activated, the source CD, MP3 or
Jukebox and the track played are
28 22 31 32 27 26 24 28
displayed on the instrument panel.
In CD /MP3 mode, press the button 30
or the knob 12 to access the main
functions:
– copy CD to Jukebox
– activate Introscan
30 30
– activate random reading
– activate repetition.
29 23 25 29
138 Maserati Multi Media System

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 139 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

In Jukebox mode, press the button 30 USB Socket On-board TRIP computer
or the knob 12 to access the main The socket B is located in the glove The On-Board Computer mode is
functions: compartment and may be provided in activated by pressing the MODE
– control Jukebox two different versions: the type button. Press the button 30 or the
– configure Jukebox provided with your vehicle can be knob 12 to access the main functions:
– delete Jukebox data. identified by the symbol shown next to – service info
it: – function status
AUX module – reset Trip A
- USB Recharge
Positioned inside the glove – reset Trip B.
compartment, the AUX input A allows - USB Full
you to connect any audio player to the Bluetooth® function
Multi Media System, provided that this
USB Recharge Socket
This socket is exclusively dedicated to The Multi Media System uses the
player is equipped with an audio Bluetooth® technology to make and
analog output (output type for powering the external source, of
receive calls using a mobile device
headphones). The AUX input is course if this source is designed for this
enabled and compatible with
4
compatible only with 3.5 mm jack purpose (e.g. iPod).
This socket cannot be used for data Bluetooth®. After pairing your mobile
connectors. to the system, the incoming and
The MMS system is capable of exchange.
dialled calls will be identified and
autonomously recognising whether it
USB Full Socket displayed on the Multi Media System
is connected to a player socket and, in display and on the instrument panel (if
This socket allows you to exchange
this case, it enables access to the audio this feature is enabled). After pairing
data and power the connected source.
functions connected to this source. the system to a mobile device, all the
If there are MP3 files on the USB key,
they will automatically start playing. phonebook contact information
This will not occur if you are already currently stored on the mobile will be
listening to a music source; in this case, uploaded to the system and it will be
you need to select the USB function by updated every time the pairing
repeatedly pressing the SRC 2 or 26 procedure is performed.
button.

B
A

Maserati Multi Media System 139

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap4_ing.fm Page 140 Friday, September 5, 2008 10:00 AM

Navigator Bose® Infotainment (optional)


When the “Navigation” mode is active, The vehicle may come equipped with
the “Navigator” option under “Info Bose® Infotainment, an advanced user
repetition on instrument panel” is interface which combines innovative
activated and the following and exclusive technical features to
information is shown on the provide entertainment, navigation,
instrument panel display: communication and information
– name of the next road to take functions within a single system. In
– distance to the next manoeuvre addition, this vehicle is equipped with
– pictogram of the next manoeuvre. Bose® Surround Sound System,
Press the button 30 or the knob 12 to acoustically optimised for the Maserati
access the main functions: Quattroporte.
– resume driving For information on the use of the
– deviate route system functions, please refer to the
4 – route options relative manual.
– consult traffic info
– move map.

140 Maserati Multi Media System

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 141 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Air conditioning and


heating system

D
E

B A

D A

4
A

H
F

Air conditioning and heating system 141

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 142 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

A - Front central and lateral vents Adjustable vents with direction Fixed air distribution vent
B - Upper dashboard vent option These cannot be adjusted in any way
These can be positioned vertically and and are designed specifically for
C - Lower dashboard vents
longitudinally by means of control I. demisting/defrosting or cooling
D - Upper lateral dashboard vents Using control J, the air flow certain areas.
E - Windscreen vents distribution can be adjusted. Vents B, C, D, E and H have the said
F - Rear central vents Vents A, F and G have the following features.
G - Rear lateral vents said features.
H - Vents beneath seats

J
142 Air conditioning and heating system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 143 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Front automatic heating/air 5) 7-position air distribution on the 9) for air recirculation activation/
conditioning controls (A) right-hand side deactivation button
1) left-hand temperature setting 6) air conditioner system's compressor 10) automatic/manual system control
2) right-hand temperature setting activation/deactivation button button
3) fan speed adjustment control 7) single/dual zone selection button 11) heated rear window activation/
4) 7-position air distribution on the 8) defrosting/demisting activation/ deactivation button
left-hand side deactivation button 12) rear instrument panel activation/
deactivation button.

4
10 9 12 10

4 1 11 7 3 6 8 2 5

Air conditioning and heating system 143

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 144 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Rear automatic heating/air 16) right-hand temperature setting 20) 3-position air distribution setting,
conditioning controls (B) 17) single/dual zone selection button on the left-hand side
(optional) 18) fan speed adjustment control 21) 3-position air distribution setting,
13) Automatic/manual system control on the right-hand side
19) air conditioner system compressor
button
activation/deactivation button
14) left-hand temperature setting
15) automatic/manual system control
button

4 13 15

20 14 17 18 19 16 21

144 Air conditioning and heating system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 145 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

General All the functions listed above can be Activation


The vehicle is equipped with an modified manually, i.e., the user can The system can be started up in a
automatic dual-zone air conditioner/ select one or more of these functions, number of ways, however, begin by
heater. as he/she wishes, using the control pressing one of the buttons 10,13 or 15
This system is special in that it adjusts panel. AUTO and using the buttons 1, 2, 14 or
the air temperature, distribution and The manual selections are always given 16 to set the temperature required.
flow in the vehicle's passenger priority over the automatic ones and This way, the system will operate in
compartment, in two separate zones: are memorised until the user chooses fully automatic mode so that the
left-hand side and right-hand side. the automatic control again. temperatures set will be reached as
In fact, the system can be controlled When a function has been set quickly as possible.
from the front by means of panel A, manually, the other automatic In this condition, manual interventions
incorporated in the central console, functions will not be affected. will activate the following functions:
and also from the rear, by means of The following parameters/functions – MONO button 7 or 17 adjusts the air
panel B, housed in the end section of can be set/modified manually: temperature and distribution in the
the tunnel. – left-hand/right-hand side air two heating/air conditioning areas. 4
The rear instrument panel can be temperature – REAR button 12 activates the rear
activated/ deactivated using the REAR – fan speed control panel
button 12 on the front panel.
– air distribution setting on 7 positions – button 6 or 19 switches off the
When the rear instrument panel B is
(left/right) compressor
active, the front panel A is disabled.
Both instrument panels allow the user – compressor activation – button 8 activates/deactivates the
to control the following parameters/ – single/dual-zone distribution priority defrosting/demisting function on the
functions: – defrosting/demisting function (MAX front side windows
– left-hand/right-hand vents’ air DEF) – button 11 activates/deactivates the
temperature – air recirculation function heated rear window.
– left-hand/right-hand vents’ air – automatic/manual control of the By altering any other parameter
distribution system manually, such as the air temperature
or distribution, these features switch
– fan speed (stepless change) – heated rear window
from the fully automatic control mode
– compressor activation – system deactivation (FULL AUTO) to the manual mode
– recirculation. – activation of rear control panel. (AUTO).

Air conditioning and heating system 145

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 146 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

On starting the vehicle after stopping, Recirculation When the compressor is deactivated or
the various parameters are controlled This is activated when button 9 is outside temperatures are below 3 °C
manually or automatically depending pressed and allows only the air already (37 °F) , the automatic recirculation
on the options selected by the user in the passenger compartment to function is switched off automatically.
before turning the engine off. As a circulate. After prolonged operation (over 15
consequence, all the manual The recirculation feature has various minutes in a row), the system switches
operations carried out before the operation modes: off the recirculation function
vehicle stop are memorised and kept – Automatic (AQS) (LED on button automatically for safety reasons,
stored until the next start up. switched on) allowing the exchange of air once
This also applies for the OFF function; again.
– Forced closed recirculation (LED on
if it were in the OFF position before
button switched on)
stopping, when next started the Forced closed recirculation
system should still be in the OFF – Forced open recirculation (LED on In this type of operation, the amber
position. button switched off). LED switched on indicates the
4 Automatic recirculation flap is closed.
System deactivation In the automatic operation mode, the
If the compressor is deactivated on recirculation is switched on when: Forced open recirculation
both the front and rear panels, In this type of operation, the LED
– the air quality sensor detects the
switching the air flow reduction switched off indicates the outside air
presence in the air of pollutants that
control 3 below the first bar results in flap is open.
may enter the vehicle during traffic
the fan switching off.
jams, when driving in built-up areas
If the compressor is enabled on the AUTO mode
or when passing through tunnels.
front and rear control panels, the air When this button is pressed (one
flow reduction control 18 cannot – the compressor is activated, outside button per zone), the automatic
request flow rates below the first bar temperatures are over 3 °C (37 °F) or system will take control of the
(it will not switch off the fan). the speed is below 6 km/h (4 mph), to following functions once again:
When switched OFF, the heated rear prevent air polluted by exhaust gas
– air distribution (for the side
window button 11 and recirculation during stops from entering the
concerned)
button 9 are controlled normally passenger compartment. When the
vehicle speed exceeds 12 Km/h – fan speed
without activating the heating/ air
conditioning system. (8 mph), the system resets the – compressor operation (with ECON
Exiting the OFF status, the previous automatic control LED lit up)
recirculation will forcibly return to the conditions. – air recirculation function.
automatic mode.
146 Air conditioning and heating system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 147 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Rear control panel System initialisation


The rear passengers can also interact Every time the battery is reconnected,
with the system using the controls on when the vehicle is started, a system
the rear control panel. initialisation procedure is required.
The rear panel is activated by pressing This is run by activating the
button 12 REAR, on the front control compressor. Both displays
panel. automatically show the passenger
compartment temperature set at 22 °C
REAR mode (72 °F).
Pressing the REAR button 12 (relative The system is set up as follows:
LED comes on) will result in the – AUTO (automatic operation, the
following: words FULL AUTO appear on the
– the controls/displays on the rear display)
control panel are enabled – Compressor enabled (the LED on the
– the parameters set from the panels button lights up)
4
are reproduced on the front and rear – Defrosting/demisting (MAX DEF)
displays. deactivated (the LED on the button is
This function is active in both "MONO" switched off)
and "DUAL-ZONE" modes. – Heated rear window deactivated
Pressing the REAR button 12 again (the LED on the button is switched
(LED on) will disable the controls on off)
the rear panel.
– Recirculation controlled by the
automatic system (if active, ‘AQS’
will appear on the display)
– the air ventilation and distribution
are set by the system
– REAR deactivated (the LED on the
button is switched off)

Air conditioning and heating system 147

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 148 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Bose® Surround Sound Diversity system 2) a 13 cm (5 in) Nd® Richbass® woofer


This is composed of two aerials linked powered by an amplifier with dual-
together, which are activated stage modulation, fitted into the
The digital Hi-Fi system, developed in
reciprocally to obtain the best signal footrest on the passenger’s side
association with BOSE®, includes
exclusive accessories such as the reception. 3) a tweeter on each of the rear door
innovative speakers with neodymium The sound system in the vehicle panels
technology, also making use of other consists of: 4) a neodymium low and medium
systems such as AudioPilot® and active 1) three medium and high range range speaker on each of the rear
electronic equalisation. speakers located on the upper part door panels
of the dashboard
AudioPilot® System
The AudioPilot ® technology detects
and measures the ambient noise, and 5 6
consequently adjusts a number of 8 9 1
4 acoustic signal parameters,
continuously, to ensure the sound
quality inside the passenger 3
compartment is always at optimum
levels. 7

Electronic equalisation
The electronic equalisation guarantees 3 4 4 2
absolute sound precision at any
volume. The automatic output
frequency balancing feature makes 1
manual adjustments using switches or 7
dials wholly unnecessary. 9

5 6 8 1

2
3 4 9
1

148 Bose® Surround Sound

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 149 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

5) one 25 cm (10 in) Power Nd® woofer


mounted on the rear parcel shelf
6) Two 90 mm Nd (Neodymium)
Twiddlers for high and medium
frequencies, positioned on the sides
of the rear luggage shelf
7) digital amplifier with AudioPilot®
technology controlled by a
microphone positioned to the right
of the steering wheel and
customised six-channel equalisation
8) AudioPilot® sensor
9) audio CD player and mono-CD drive
for GPS navigation maps, in the 4
centre of the dashboard.
– aerial incorporated into rear window
– aerial incorporated in the
windscreen.

Bose® Surround Sound 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap5_FOTO_ing.fm Page 150 Friday, May 30, 2008 2:22 PM

150

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap5_FOTO_ing.fm Page 151 Friday, May 30, 2008 2:22 PM

Using the vehicle

Starting the engine 152


Electronic automatic gearbox 154
Using the brakes 165
Use of the engine 166
Constant speed regulator (Cruise Control) 168
Electronic suspensions (Skyhook) (optional) 171
Headlights 174
Driving conditions 175
Air quality control devices 179
Parking 181 5
Tyres 184
Useful accessories to keep on-board 185

151

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 152 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Starting the engine 1) Ensure that the handbrake is The engine can only be started when
engaged and that the doors are the gearshift lever is in P (PARK) or N
closed. (NEUTRAL).
Keep the brake pedal pressed
2) Keep the brake pedal pressed when When the engine has started up,
when starting the engine.
starting the engine. release the key, which will
automatically return to the MAR
It is dangerous to run the 3) Do not press the accelerator pedal.
position.
engine in a closed space. The 4) Check that the letter P (PARK) or N In the event of misfiring, turn the key
engine consumes oxygen and (NEUTRAL) is shown on the gear back to the STOP position and wait
discharges carbon dioxide, carbon display and on the instrument until the gearshift display switches off
monoxide and other toxic gases. panel. and then repeat the entire procedure.
5) Turn the ignition key to the AVV
WARNING: Before start-up, switch off
the electrical devices with a high
position and release it as soon as the Starting-off when the engine is
power consumption (air-conditioning
engine starts. Do not keep the key cool
turned to the AVV position for a Start-off slowly, avoiding sudden
and heating system, heated rear
long time. position. In the event of accelerations and rev the engine at
window, headlights, etc.).
misfiring, turn the key back to the low-medium speeds. High-
5 WARNING: Do not start the engine if
STOP position and wait until the performance driving should be
gearshift display switches off and avoided until the water temperature
the fuel level in the tank is low.
then repeat the entire procedure. reaches 65–70 °C (149-158 °F).
WARNING: If you attempt to start the
engine without depressing the brake
pedal, a message on the display will
warn you to push it.

152 Starting the engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 153 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Emergency starting with You are also advised not to seconds, you will need to turn it back
auxiliary battery approach the battery with to MAR and then to STOP to obtain a
If the battery is flat, the engine can be naked flames or lit cigarettes further 30 seconds within which to
started using another battery having and not to cause sparks: risk of remove the key. In the event that the
explosion and fire. key unlocking system fails or if it is not
the same or slightly higher capacity
possible to shift the gearshift lever to P,
than the flat one.
WARNING: Do not use a battery- to remove the key you must turn it to
Proceed as follows:
charger for emergency starting under STOP, then remove the cap A, using a
1) Connect the positive terminals (+) of any circumstances. You could damage pen or sufficiently pointed tool, then
the two batteries with a special the electronic systems, particularly the press the button just uncovered and at
cable. control units managing the ignition the same time extract the key. Once
2) Connect the negative terminals (-) and fuel supply functions. the key has been removed, refit the
of the two batteries with a special cap A.
cable. Remember that if the engine
3) Start the engine. is not started, the brake servo
4) When the engine starts, remove the and power steering systems
cables in the reverse order to the are not activated and therefore the
above.
effort required on the brake pedal and 5
steering wheel is much greater.
If the engine does not start after a
number of attempts, do not continue
Turning off the engine
indefinitely but consult the Maserati
Service Network. With the engine idling, rotate the
ignition key to the STOP position.
Do not carry out this A burst on the accelerator pedal
procedure if you have no before turning off the engine has no
experience of it: incorrect purpose and increases fuel
manoeuvres can originate high consumption.
electrical discharges and even cause
the battery to explode. WARNING: The ignition key can only
be removed from the switch when the
gearshift lever is in position P. In
addition, it must be removed within 30
seconds after turning the key to STOP. A
If you do not remove the key within 30
Starting the engine 153

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 154 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Electronic automatic The gearbox operating mode is Shift-Lock


controlled by the lever A. This safety system allows you to shift
gearbox This lever can be positioned in the from P (PARK) to another position only
following sectors: if the brake pedal is depressed. This
The electronically-controlled gearbox P – (PARK) prevents the vehicle from involuntarily
has six forward gear ratios and one R – (REVERSE) jumping forward or backward.
reverse gear. The gears can also be N – (NEUTRAL)
engaged manually once you have D – (DRIVE) Key-Lock
shifted the gearshift lever to the sector + / - – (MANUAL) This function allows you to remove the
provided. The position of the gearshift lever A is key from the ignition switch only when
The gearbox controls are the shown on the gear display E by the the gearshift lever A is in position P
following: illumination of the corresponding and within a maximum time of 30
A - Gearshift lever; letter. This letter is also shown on the seconds; when this time has elapsed,
B - Button on the gearshift lever to instrument panel display. the key can no longer be removed.
engage reverse gear R and park P;
WARNING: In order to properly use the Starting the engine
C - SPORT button; The engine can only be started when
Automatic Gearbox, it is essential that
5 D - ICE (low grip) button; you read through this whole chapter, the gearshift lever A is in P or N.
E - Gear display. so that you can learn right from the
The SPORT and ICE modes can be start what the correct and permitted Always start the engine
selected both when the gearbox is set operations are. The gearbox is also holding the brake pedal
to automatic (AUTO) and to sequential equipped with Shift-Lock and Key-Lock depressed.
manual (MANUAL) operation. safety systems.
WARNING: Upon setting off, after
A starting the engine, do not depress the
accelerator pedal before and while
C
B shifting the gearshift lever A.
This is particularly important when the
engine is cold.
D

E F

154 Electronic automatic gearbox

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 155 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Driving the vehicle the engine running, as this may lead to WARNING: In the event that the key
After starting the engine, let the malfunctions. unlocking system fails or if it is not
engine idle with the brake pedal possible to shift the gearshift lever to P,
depressed (Shift-Lock safety), then WARNING: For more comfortable to remove the key you must turn it to
shift the gearshift lever A to D, or to starting (with the gearshift lever in D, STOP, then remove the cap G, using a
the sequential manual operating R or Manual and the electric parking pen or sufficiently pointed tool, then
position + or - . brake - EPB - engaged), push the brake press the button just uncovered and at
Release the brake pedal and gradually pedal, manually deactivate the EPB the same time extract the key. Once
depress the accelerator pedal. system by pulling the lever F upward, the key has been removed, refit the
and push the accelerator pedal. cap G.
WARNING: The gearshift lever can only
Stopping the vehicle If you turn off the engine with the
be shifted from P when the ignition
key is in the MAR position and the Regardless of the position of the gearshift lever A in a position different
button B and the brake pedal are gearshift lever A, simply depress the from P, an acoustic signal will sound for
depressed (Shift-Lock safety). brake pedal to stop the vehicle. a few seconds and a message will be
displayed indicating to shift the lever
For safety reasons, the gearshift lever When the gearshift lever is in to P.
A can be shifted from D to R and P only position D, R or M, the engine When the driver’s door is opened with 5
when the button B is pressed. It is also idling and the vehicle on an the gearshift lever A in a position
advisable to depress the brake pedal even ground, if the brake pedal is not different from P, an acoustic signal will
during this manoeuvre. depressed, the vehicle tends to move. sound for a few seconds and a message
warning the driver that the gearshift
The ignition key can be removed from lever is not in P will be displayed.
WARNING: Do not run the engine at
top RPM until it has reached its the switch only when the gearshift
operating temperature. lever A is in position P and within 30
seconds from turning the key to STOP.
WARNING: In case of performance The letter P (Key-Lock safety) is
starts, check that the electric parking displayed on the instrumental panel
brake is deactivated. for the full 30 seconds.
If you do not remove the key within 30
Do not keep the vehicle seconds, you will need to turn it back
stationary for a long time to MAR and then to STOP to obtain a
with the brake pedal further 30 seconds within which to G
depressed, the gearshift lever in D and remove the key.
Electronic automatic gearbox 155

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 156 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Gearshifting is always active Automatic operation (AUTO) gearshift lever; it is disengaged by


and may be performed even pressing the button and the brake
To set automatic operation, shift the
when one or more doors, the pedal at the same time It is advisable
gearshift lever A to one of the
engine compartment lid or the to also hold the brake pedal depressed
following positions:
luggage compartment lid are open. when moving the gearshift lever to the
P – Park
Therefore, in these conditions, take other positions.
R – reverse gear
great care to avoid moving the
N – Neutral P – Park
gearshift lever and so accidentally
D – Drive, automatic forward gear
engage gears. When parking the vehicle, shift the
(6 ratios)
lever to P. A gearbox device will lock
Selecting automatic or sequential the driving wheels.
manual operating mode The position of the gearshift lever is
shown on the gear display E by the
The gearbox can be used both in fully WARNING: Shift the lever to position P
illumination of the corresponding
automatic (position D) and in only when the vehicle is stationary.
letter. This letter is also displayed on Therefore, it is advisable to perform
sequential manual (positions + or -)
the instrument panel. this manoeuvre with the brake pedal
mode.
To select the desired mode, shift the depressed.
The gearshift lever A can freely be
5 gearshift lever A to:
shifted from D to N. The button B must
D – automatic gearshifting (AUTO) WARNING: To prevent accidental
also be pressed to engage and engagement, the gearshift lever can
MANUAL (+ / -) – sequential manual
disengage R. only be shifted from P to any other
gearshifting.
Position P is engaged by pressing the position when the button B and the
The lever can always be shifted from
button B and then moving the brake pedal are depressed.
one position to the other, even when
the vehicle is moving.
You can actually continually shift WARNING: Before getting out of the
between D and MANUAL. vehicle, check that the automatic
If automatic gearshift mode is parking brake is engaged. Shift the
selected, the word AUTO and the letter gearshift lever to P even when you
D will be shown on the instrument need to get out of the vehicle for only
panel display, while for sequential a few seconds leaving the engine
manual gearshifting, the word running.
MANUAL and the gear engaged will be
shown.

156 Electronic automatic gearbox

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 157 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

If you turn off the engine with the – Take the screwdriver out of the hole, WARNING: Work extremely carefully
gearshift lever A in a position different taking care not to move the so as not to damage the trim panels.
from P, an acoustic signal will sound for gearshift lever.
a few seconds and a message will be – Move the gearshift lever fully back If the automatic parking brake
displayed indicating to shift the lever to N. engagement system is active, the EPB is
to P. automatically applied when the
– Cap the hole using the tray H to
vehicle is stopped, (see page 181).
prevent foreign bodies from falling
When the driver’s door is opened with
into the gearbox and damaging it.
the gearshift lever A in a position WARNING: In the event of a battery
different from P, an acoustic signal will The gearshift lever is now released. failure, manually disengage the
sound for a few seconds and a message parking brake (EPB) before you drive
warning the driver that the gearshift While moving the gearshift lever, (see page 181).
lever is not in P will be displayed. remember to press the button B on the
lever.
WARNING: In the event of a battery
failure, manually release the driving
wheel locking device before you drive.
5
In the event of a battery failure, shift
the gearshift lever from P to another
position before moving the vehicle.
To do this, follow the emergency
procedure described below:
– Remove the pocket-change tray H.
– Using the screwdriver provided in
the toolkit, push on the gearshift
lever locking mechanism through
the hole.
H
– At the same time, slightly move the
gearshift lever towards N in order to
release the lever locking mechanism.

Electronic automatic gearbox 157

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 158 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

R - Reverse gear N - Neutral The system has been programmed to


With the vehicle stationary, the engine With the vehicle stationary and the classify all driving styles, in relation to
idling and the button B pressed, shift brake pedal depressed, move the the above mentioned parameters, and
the gearshift lever A to position R. It is gearshift lever A to N. to associate them with the various
advisable to also depress the brake This function should be used when you vehicle settings, which go from
pedal when shifting to this position. need to tow or push the vehicle. extremely comfortable and economic
When the lever is in position R, the driving to full sports-style driving. The
system emits an acoustic signal for a D –Automatic forward gear setting is selected automatically.
few seconds. Select this position when you wish to
You can also shift the gearshift lever to use of all the automatic gearshift + / - – Sequential manual
R when the vehicle is not completely functions. operation (MANUAL)
stationary, however, this does not With the vehicle stationary and the This allows you to manually engage
mean that reverse gear is actually brake pedal depressed, move the gears while driving.
engaged, since there is a limit speed gearshift lever A to D; if the gearshift When the automatic gearshift mode is
above which the gear is not engaged. lever is position in P or R, also press the selected (position D), shift the
When the speed drops to below this button B. gearshift lever A to + or -.
limit, reverse gear is engaged. When the function is set, the letter D When this mode is selected, the symbol
5 illuminates on the gear display and on + or – illuminates on the gear display E,
WARNING: To prevent accidental the instrument panel. based on the position of the gearshift
engagement, the gearshift lever can When this function is active, the ECU lever, and the gear engaged is shown
only be moved from R to any other controls automatic engagement of the on the instrument panel display.
position when the button B is pressed. six gears. The gears will be engaged in
It is advisable to also depress the brake relation to the travelling speed, engine When sequential manual
pedal when shifting to this position. RPM, accelerator position, speed with operation is selected,
which the pedal is depressed as well as upshifting or downshifting
the travelling conditions (uphill, must be performed manually.
downhill, curves).

158 Electronic automatic gearbox

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 159 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

To engage the gears, shift the gearshift When the system refuses to engage a Other system functions
lever A to one of the following two gear, an acoustic signal is sounded for The settings automatically selected by
positions: a few seconds. the system operate in three modes:
+ UP to engage a higher gear
- NORMAL
- DOWN to engage a lower gear. Sequential manual gearshift mode can - SPORT
only be selected from position D, - ICE (low grip).
WARNING: However, some conditions whatever the driving mode (SPORT, Activate the desired mode by pressing
will remain automatically controlled, NORMAL) active upon requesting a the relative button.
for example, when the engine is gearshift. The active mode is shown on the
overrevving or underrevving, the The gear selected by the automatic instrument panel display.
system automatically engages a higher gearbox will remain engaged when
or lower gear. the lever A is moved. For each mode there are various
Shifting the lever back to D, automatic vehicle settings, that are automatically
WARNING: If you request a gearshift in operation will instantly be resumed, set by the system in relation to the
conditions where the engine is and a gear will be engaged based on travelling speed, engine RPM,
overrevving or underrevving, the the driving style and mode selected. accelerator position, speed with which
system will not accept the command.
the pedal is depressed as well as the
In the event of a failure of the travelling conditions (uphill, downhill, 5
WARNING: The electronic control unit sequential manual gearshift system,
is programmed to handle one curves).
the gearbox ECU will select automatic
gearshift at a time, therefore, fast and operation. NORMAL
repeated requests will not necessarily
NORMAL mode is the default setting
result in a gearshift.
when the engine is started.
The higher or lower gear is engaged
This mode is intended specifically for
only if the previous gearshift
comfortable and fuel-economy driving
procedure has been completed.
(low longitudinal and lateral
acceleration); the gears are shifted
with minimum vibration in lowest
noise (gearshifting at low engine
RPM).

Electronic automatic gearbox 159

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 160 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

SPORT ICE (Low grip) While driving, the system


SPORT mode is activated by pressing This mode can be used on particularly automatically switches to the upper
the button C; the word SPORT slippery road surfaces (e.g., rain, snow, gear if the engine reaches the pre-
illuminate on the instrument panel ice). To activate/deactivate this mode, established speed rate (3,000 RPM).
display. press button D. The word ICE will “Low-grip" mode has priority over
To return from SPORT mode to illuminate on the instrument panel SPORT mode and assists the MSP
NORMAL mode, press the button display. system.
again. In “Low-grip" mode the system uses
As "SPORT" mode has a lower priority 2nd instead of 1st gear. This means that A downshift request from 6th
than “low-grip” mode, if this is already when you start from a stationary to 5th gear will only be
active when activating “SPORT” mode, position with the engine running and accepted if the engine speed
the system will ignore the command. you have selected automatic operation rate in 5th gear is lower than 3,000
(gearshift lever in D), 2nd gear will be RPM. As "low-grip" mode can be
engaged; if you have selected activated at any time and the system
sequential manual operation limits the engine's speed rate to 3,000
(gearshift lever in MANUAL) and you RPM in all gears except for the 6th,
shift the gearshift lever A from N to R unrequested gearshifts could take
5 or when the vehicle stops, 2nd gear will place.
automatically be engaged.
When sequential manual mode is
selected with 2nd gear engaged, a
downshift request will be ignored.

160 Electronic automatic gearbox

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 161 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

In any case, it is advisable to deactivate Strategies during downhill driving Strategies in curves
"SPORT" mode before selecting "low- When the accelerator pedal is The system detects when the vehicle
grip" mode. released, the gearbox system detects goes into a curve through the lateral
that the vehicle is moving downhill acceleration and the steering angle.
When sequential manual operation is and deactivates upshifting. When the Detecting this condition, it controls
active, regardless of the mode set accelerator pedal is depressed, gearshifting using a specific mode.
(NORMAL, SPORT, ICE), the gearbox upshifting is reactivated but will be This mode is exited when the vehicle
automatically upshifts or downshifts delayed by a few seconds. comes out of the curve, at a distance
when reaching the minimum and When the brake pedal is depressed, that varies depending on the vehicle
maximum engine RPM, respectively. the gearbox system downshifts to speed.
This is to prevent engine overrevving provide enhanced engine braking
or underrevving. power. Fast-off strategy
In other words, when driving downhill, When the accelerator pedal is fully
the gearbox system operates so as to released, the system deactivates
avoid upshifting and shifting gears upshifting.
when the accelerator pedal is released, When the accelerator pedal is next
and delays gear engagement by a few depressed, upshifting is reactivated
second when the accelerator pedal is only after a few seconds. 5
depressed. In addition, when the Upshifting is also deactivated when
brakes are applied, it engages the the accelerator pedal is partially
lowest gear in order to provide released; the system waits the time
enhanced engine braking power. necessary to evaluate if the release
This strategy is aimed at making action is completed.
downhill driving safer.

Electronic automatic gearbox 161

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 162 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Hot-mode strategy Malfunction indication When shifting to D, only a few gears


In the event that the engine oil or The malfunctions indicated are will be available for shifting,
coolant temperature is too high or attributable to two causes: depending on the malfunction found.
both, the gearbox system reduces the
– Gearbox failure WARNING: If a gearbox failure is
maximum engine speed to 4000 RPM.
Therefore, upshifting will occur at this – Gearbox oil temperature too high signalled, take your vehicle to the
limit. In both cases, the warning light nearest Maserati Service Network
This strategy does not manage illuminates. Centre as soon as possible to have the
downhill driving, so as to always have problem corrected.
the efficiency of engine braking Gearbox failure
together with the standard braking A gearbox failure is indicated on the If the failure is signalled when the
system. display by the message "Check engine is started, it means that the
transmission go to dealer". While gearbox ECU detected a fault when
MSP system operations driving, the ECU that controls the the vehicle was last used. Also in this
In order to prevent unstable driving device sets an emergency program. case, take your vehicle to the nearest
conditions, the MSP system may Maserati Service Network Centre to
request the gearbox system to WARNING: In these conditions, we have the gearbox checked.
5 deactivate gearshifting. The system recommended that you stop the
handles this request depending on the vehicle and turn off the engine for at When the gearbox is
gear engaged and on the RPM, and least one minute. When restarting the malfunctioning, drive very
decides whether to accept it or not. engine, the autodiagnostic system may carefully considering that
cancel the malfunction, which will in vehicle performance is reduced. In
Cruise Control any case be recorded by the ECU. addition, the reverse gear safety lock
With cruise control the gearbox system may not be active: absolutely do not
selects such settings as to provide In failure conditions, the gearshift shift the lever to R when the vehicle is
enhanced comfort and fuel-economy. lever A can still be shifted to positions moving.
R, N and D.

162 Electronic automatic gearbox

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 163 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Gearbox oil temperature too high Push start Tow the vehicle using the towing hook
This message is displayed when the The engine cannot be push-started. If found in the toolkit. Screw the towing
gearbox oil has reached the maximum the battery is flat, start the engine hook down tightly in its seat, on the
temperature. In this case, the gearbox using an appropriate emergency lower, right-hand side of the front
ECU sets an emergency program. battery following the instructions bumper.
given in Section 6 “In an emergency”. In order to tow the vehicle, turn the
WARNING: We recommend that you key to MAR and engage neutral by
always stop the vehicle, shift the lever Towing the vehicle shifting the gearshift lever A to N.
to position P or N and keep the engine If the electronic parking brake (EPB) is
idle until the temperature warning If you need to tow the vehicle, observe applied, you must release it, see on
light goes off and the message the following recommendations: page 181.
disappears from the display. Resume – if possible, have the vehicle
driving without demanding high transported on a vehicle specific for Do not extract the key, as the
engine performance. roadside assistance and recovery steering wheel will lock
If the warning light comes back on and If this is not possible: automatically and you will be
the message is displayed again, stop unable to steer the wheels.
– tow the vehicle by raising the driving
the vehicle again and run the engine at
wheels (rear)
idle speed until the light goes off and
If also this solution is not practicable:
WARNING: If you have to tow the 5
the message disappears. vehicle with 2 wheels raised, ensure
If the interval between the two – tow the vehicle for a distance of less that the ignition key is in the STOP
warnings is less than 15 minutes, it is than 100 km (62 mi) at a speed below position. Otherwise, with MSP
advisable to stop the vehicle, turn off 60 km/h (37 mph). activated, the relative ECU stores a
the engine and wait for the engine/ malfunction and consequently the
gearbox assembly to fully cool down. warning light on both the
instrument panel and the display
comes on, requiring intervention by
the Maserati Service Network to reset
the system.

Electronic automatic gearbox 163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 164 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

When towing the vehicle, Gearshift levers on the steering If you then keep to a constant driving
make sure that you observe wheel (optional) style (low longitudinal and lateral
the road traffic regulations In sequential manual operating acceleration), the gearbox
concerning both the towing device conditions, upshifting and automatically switches back to
and driving conduct. automatic operation.
downshifting can be controlled not
only with the gearshift lever A but also
When towing the vehicle with
with the two levers positioned behind
the engine off, remember
the steering wheel.
that, without the assistance of
L - Lower gear engagement
the brake servo, a stronger effort is
lever - DOWN
required on the brake pedal for
M - Upper gear engagement lever + UP
braking and on the steering wheel for
Also in automatic operation, when the
steering.
gearshift lever A is in position D
(DRIVE), you can shift to a different
Screw down the towing hook
gear by moving one of the levers. This
into its seat (approx. 11 turns).
action will temporarily switch the
Accurately clean the threaded
system to sequential manual
5 seat before tightening the hook.
operation.

L M

164 Electronic automatic gearbox

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 165 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Using the brakes In order to fully exploit the ABS:


– You will perceive a light "pulsation"
WARNING: To obtain a good running of the brake pedal during
in of the brake pads and discs, avoid emergency braking or braking under
sudden braking during the first 300 km low grip conditions: this indicates
(190 mi). that the ABS is operating. Do not
release the pedal but continue to
The ABS is a component of the braking press it to give continuity to the
system that offers two basic braking action.
advantages: – The ABS prevents the wheels from
– It avoids locking of the wheels and locking, but it does not increase the
thus skidding during emergency physical grip limits between the tyres
braking and especially under low and the road. Therefore, even if
grip conditions. your vehicle is fitted with ABS,
always ensure to keep to a safe
– It makes it possible to brake and
distance from the vehicle in front of
steer at the same time in order to
yours and reduce your speed when
avoid unexpected obstacles or to
entering a bend. 5
direct the vehicle where desired
when braking: this is done in The pad wear limit is indicated by the
keeping with the physical limits of illumination of the warning light ,
the tyre’s side grip. on the instrument panel.
In this event, please contact the
Maserati Service Network.

Using the brakes 165

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 166 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Use of the engine While driving Ensure proper operation of the various
Never travel with the Rev. Counter devices by checking the respective
indicator approaching the peak r.p.m. - control instruments.
Breaking-in
not even downhill.
Today's most modern methods of WARNING: Continuing to drive when a
When the Rev. Counter indicator is
production afford high precision in the red warning light switches on could
approaching the peak r.p.m. (red-
construction and coupling of cause serious damage to the vehicle
coloured zone), take precautions to
components. However, the moving and affect its performance.
avoid exceeding that limit.
parts do undergo a settling process,
basically in the first hours of the Do not travel downhill with
WARNING: Under normal conditions,
vehicle operation. the engine off, as the servo
all the red light warning indicators on
brake will no longer function
the instrument panel's multi-function
Engine and transmission display should be off. When they come
due to the vacuum decrease and thus
Avoid exceeding 5000 r.p.m. for the after a few braking attempts, the
on, they indicate a malfunction in the
system becomes totally inefficient.
first 1,000 trip km. relative system. The only exception is
The power steering will also lose its
After starting the vehicle, do not the engine oil level warning light, see
efficiency in these condition.
exceed 4,000 r.p.m. until the engine page 243.
5 has warmed up sufficiently (water
temperature: 65, 70 °C - 149,158 °F).
Do not drive keeping the engine at a
constant high speed rate for a
prolonged time.

166 Use of the engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 167 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Engine control system (EOBD) In addition, the system includes a


The EOBD (European On Board diagnostics connector that can be
Diagnosis) system fitted in the vehicle interfaced with suitable instruments.
conforms with the 2003/76B/EC This makes it possible to read the error
(EURO 4) Directive. codes stored in the control unit,
This system continuously monitors the together with a set of specific
vehicle components connected with parameters for the engine operation
emissions; it also indicates, when the diagnostics cycle.
warning light comes on on the
WARNING: When the ignition key is
instrument panel, that the
turned to the MAR position, if the
components in question are in poor
warning light does not switch on
condition.
or if it switches on while driving,
The purpose is to:
contact the Maserati Service Network
– keep the system efficiency under as soon as possible.
control
– indicate when a problem causes an WARNING: After the problem has been
increase in emissions exceeding the eliminated, the Maserati Service 5
threshold established by European Network personnel is required to
regulations perform tests on the test bench for a
– indicate the need for replacement of complete check of the system and if
deteriorated components. necessary, also road tests which may
even involve long distances.

Use of the engine 167

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 168 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Constant speed regulator Controls Turn the rotating section B to position


Cruise Control is activated by means of (+) to save the speed reached or to
(Cruise Control) increase the speed stored.
switch A, rotating section B and button
C (RCL). Turn the rotating section B to position
General Switch A has two settings: (–) to decrease the speed stored.
The electronic speed regulator (cruise Every time dial B is reset, the speed is
– OFF: in this position the device is increased or decrease by approx. 1 km/
control) enables the driver to maintain deactivated;
the desired vehicle speed without h. When the rotating section is kept
– ON: this is the normal position for turned, the speed varies continuously.
pressing the accelerator pedal. This
the device operation. When the When a new speed is reached, it will
reduces driving fatigue on highways,
device is activated, the green automatically remain constant.
especially long trips, as the set speed is
warning light on the display Pushbutton C (RCL) is used to restore
automatically maintained.
turns on together with the message the speed stored.
"Cruise Control on".
WARNING: The device can only be
switched on at speeds exceeding The rotating section B is used to store WARNING: When the ignition key is
30 km/h (19 mph) and it switches off the vehicle speed and to keep it turned to STOP or switch A is in the
automatically when the brake pedal is constant, or to increase or decrease the OFF position, the speed saved is erased
5 pressed. speed stored. and the system switches off.

The Cruise Control function


must only be activated when
traffic and the route permit a
constant speed to be maintained
safely for a sufficiently long distance.
B A

168 Constant speed regulator (Cruise Control)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 169 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Storing a speed Restoring the speed stored in the Increasing the speed stored in
Turn switch A to the ON position and memory the memory
reach the desired speed driving If the device has been switched off The speed stored in the memory can be
normally. Keep the rotating section B after braking, the speed saved increased in two ways:
turned to (+) for at least three seconds previously can be restored as follows: – by pressing the accelerator and then
and then release it. The vehicle speed – accelerate gradually until you reach saving the new speed reached (keep
will be saved and the accelerator pedal a speed close to the one stored in the the rotating section B turned for
can then be released. memory; more than three seconds);
The vehicle will proceed at the – engage the gear selected when the or
constant speed stored in the memory speed was saved in the memory (4th,
until the brake pedal is pressed. – by turning the rotating section B
5th or 6th gear); temporarily to position (+): each
If necessary, (for example, when
overtaking), you can accelerate by – press button C (RCL). impulse transmitted by the rotating
simply pressing the accelerator pedal. section will cause a slight increase in
Afterwards, when you release the speed (about 1 km/h - 0.6 mph),
accelerator pedal, the vehicle will whereas a constant pressure on the
return to the speed saved previously. same rotating section will cause a
continuous increase in speed. When 5
the rotating section B is released, the
new speed will be automatically
stored in the memory.

Constant speed regulator (Cruise Control) 169

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 170 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Reducing the speed stored in the When driving with the Cruise In the case of faulty operation
memory Control activated, do not shift or failure of the device, move
The speed stored in the memory can be to neutral. It is advisable to switch A to the OFF position
reduced in two ways: switch on the Cruise Control only and contact the Maserati Service
when traffic and road conditions Network after having checked the
– by switching off the device, pressing permit safe use of this device, that is: fuse for intactness.
the brake pedal and then saving the on straight and dry roads,
new speed in the memory (turning expressways or highways, smooth- Switch A can be left on the ON
the rotating section B to position (+) flowing traffic and smooth asphalt. Do position at all times without
for at least three seconds); not switch this device on in the city or damaging the device. In any
or in heavy traffic. case, it is advisable to deactivate the
– by keeping the rotating section B device when it is not in use. Move
turned to position (-) until the new The Cruise Control can only be switch A to the OFF position to
speed is reached: the latter will be switched on at speeds prevent speeds from being
stored automatically. exceeding 30 km/h (19 mph). unintentionally saved in the memory.

Resetting the speed stored in the The device can only be


5 memory switched on in 4th, 5th or 6th
The speed stored in the memory is gear, depending upon the car
automatically zero-reset: speed.
– by switching the engine off; When driving downhill with
or the device switched on, the
– by moving switch A to the OFF car may pick up speed slightly,
position. exceeding the speed stored in the
memory due to the change in the
engine load.

170 Constant speed regulator (Cruise Control)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 171 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Electronic suspensions The system is controlled by an ECU The strategy used by the system
which manages the solenoid valves on controlling the suspension damping is
(Skyhook) (optional) each shock absorber in response to the aimed at reducing the vertical
sensor signals, adjusting the oscillations of the vehicle (rolling and
The electronic system controlling the suspension damping and setting. pitching) to a minimum.
vehicle suspensions uses the The sensors that enable the ECU to The activation of SPORT mode sets the
sophisticated on board sensors and is calculate the vehicle speed, vertical suspension for sports-style driving and
aimed at optimising vehicle and side acceleration, as well as the acts on the ASR and Automatic
performance. instantaneous brake circuit pressure, Gearbox systems (if present) as well,
The system is capable of constantly and consequently to control the modifying their setting for racing-style
monitoring suspensions' damping suspension damping, are the driving.
through the actuator fitted on each following:
shock absorber. This way, the shock – side acceleration sensor Self-diagnosis
absorber setting is suited to the Each time the engine is started, the
– front LH vertical acceleration sensor
roadbed conditions and vehicle system runs a self-diagnostics cycle,
dynamics, thus improving passenger – front RH vertical acceleration sensor
which is indicated by the switching on
comfort and road-holding. – rear vertical acceleration sensor of the warning light on the display.
By pressing button A the driver can – front LH wheel acceleration sensor 5
choose, even while driving, a normal or – front RH wheel acceleration sensor
racing-type setting for the
suspensions, depending on his/her – vehicle speed sensor
own driving style. This way, the system – brake pedal switch.
operates with a shock absorber
"softer" setting in Normal mode, and a
"harder" setting if the SPORT mode is
selected.

Electronic suspensions (Skyhook) (optional) 171

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 172 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Settings WARNING: The SPORT setting is not The electronic suspension control
advisable when roadbeds are not in system works jointly with the MSP
The driver can select, in relation to
perfect condition or are slippery. system (electronic anti-skid device):
roadbed, speed, driving style and
comfort, one of the two setting levels when the suspensions are set to
Press button A again, even while normal, stability is increased under
provided by the system: normal or
driving, to reset the normal setting: medium and low grip conditions, while
racing-style.
when the normal setting is activated when the SPORT mode is enabled, the
Normal setting, active when the SPORT
the SPORT warning light on the multi- MSP system optimises racing-style
mode is deactivated, favours comfort
function display and the button LED go driving.
and higher driving stability with low
off.
and average grip conditions.
WARNING: In low- and medium-grip
Racing-style setting, active when the
conditions (e.g., rain, snow, ice, sand,
SPORT function is enabled, favours
etc.) it is advisable not to activate
wheel drive and permits a racing-style
SPORT mode, even with the MSP
driving with the best road holding.
enabled.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the
system will provide the last setting
selected before engine switching off.
5 The racing-style setting can be
switched on only with the ignition key
in the MAR position and it is enabled
by pressing button A, even while
driving. When the SPORT mode is
activated, the SPORT indicator on the
multi-function display and the button
LED light up.
A

172 Electronic suspensions (Skyhook) (optional)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 173 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Fault signals WARNING: In the event of a On the other hand, if the problem
malfunction in the electronic system persists, the warning light on the
If one or more electric components in
controlling the suspensions, which is multi-function display will switch on
the system malfunction while driving,
indicated by the warning light on again.
the ECU illuminates the relative
the display switching on while driving, In both cases, the system must be
warning light accompanied by the
you should keep a moderate speed and checked by the Maserati Service
message “Check suspensions” on the
have the vehicle checked as soon as Network.
display. In addition, the ECU calibrates
possible by the Maserati Service The detected fault is memorized by the
the shock absorbers to a preset value,
Network. electronic control unit and can be
thus ensuring a safe vehicle set up.
Should the fault involve one shock diagnosed at a Maserati Service
If a malfunction occurs while driving, Network Centre even if it has
absorber only, this is no longer
signalled by the warning light on disappeared spontaneously.
controlled by the electronic control
the display switching on, it is advisable
unit and remains in the position it had
to stop the vehicle as soon as possible
when the fault occurred. It is therefore
and turn the ignition key to the STOP
possible that one of the four shock
position and then re-start the engine.
absorbers has a fixed calibration,
If the malfunction is no longer present
differing from that of the other ones.
In any case, a safe and secure car
and the warning light on the 5
display does not switch on again, the
driving at low speed is always
electronic suspension system will
guaranteed.
resume normal operation.

Electronic suspensions (Skyhook) (optional) 173

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 174 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Headlights The much broader illumination of the The strong light produced by this type
side zones markedly increases driving of headlight requires the use of an
safety as it offers the driver better automatic system to keep the position
Xenon headlights detection of other persons on the side of the headlights constant and to
The gas-discharge (Xenon) headlights of the road (pedestrians, bicycle riders prevent glare for approaching
work with an electric arc saturated and motorcycle drivers). vehicles, in the case of braking,
with Xenon gas under pressure, The electric arc requires very high acceleration or load transport.
instead of the incandescent filament. voltage for striking, but afterwards
The light produced is markedly power is supplied at a lower voltage. If bulb replacement is
superior to that of traditional light The headlights reach maximum necessary, contact the
bulbs, in terms of quality (brighter brightness about 0.5 seconds after Maserati Service Network
light) as well as of the span and being switched on. only: DANGER - RISK OF ELECTRICAL
positioning of the area illuminated. SHOCKS!
The advantages offered by better
lighting are perceptible (less eye strain
and increased orientation for the
driver and thus driving safety)
5 especially in the case of bad weather,
fog and/or insufficient road indications
owing to the broader illumination of
the side zones, which are normally left
in the dark.

174 Headlights

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 175 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Driving conditions Capacities Before you drive


WARNING: Use unleaded fuel only! – Ensure that lights and headlights are
Before your trip The use of fuel containing lead would working properly.
irreparably damage the catalytic – Adjust the position of the seat,
Check the following at regular
converters. steering wheel and rear-view mirrors
intervals and always before long trips:
so that you have the best driving
– tyre pressure and condition For fluid and lubricant specifications position.
– levels of fluids and lubricants and quantities, follow the indications
– Ensure that nothing (mat covers,
– conditions of the windscreen wiper contained in the section 7 “CAPACITIES
etc.) is blocking the pedals' travel.
blades AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS”.
– Carefully arrange any objects in the
– proper operation of the warning luggage compartment, to prevent
lights and of the external lights.
Safe driving
sudden stops from jerking them
Although the vehicle is fitted with forward.
WARNING: In any case, it is advisable to active and passive safety devices, the
carry out these checks at least every – Avoid heavy meals before a trip. A
driver's conduct is always a decisive
800 km (500 mi), and to always comply light snack helps to keep your
factor for road safety.
with the compulsory measures reflexes sharp. In particular, avoid
prescribed by the Service Time
Below are some simple rules for
drinking alcohol. 5
travelling safely in different
Schedule. conditions. You will be, no doubt, – Remember to check the indications
familiar with some of them but, in any contained in the chapter “Before
It is also advisable to: case, it would be useful to read them your trip”, in this section,
– clean the glass on the external light carefully. periodically.
and all other glass surfaces
– properly adjust the mirrors, steering
wheel, seats and seat belts.

Driving conditions 175

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 176 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

In addition to being Travelling Always fasten your seat belts,


prohibited by current including any child seats.
– The first rule for safe driving is
regulations, it is extremely Travelling without your seat
caution. Being careful also means
dangerous to ride inside the luggage belt fastened increases the risk of
being in a position to be able to
compartment or on the front lid of the serious injury in the event of a
predict driving behaviour of other
vehicle. In the event of an accident, collision.
drivers, that may be wrong or
persons transported in this manner are
careless.
more exposed to the risk of serious – Do not drive for too many hours at a
injury. Passengers must only travel – Keep a safe distance from vehicles in time. Make frequent stops to stretch
seated in the vehicle seats, with the front of you, adjusting this distance your legs and refresh yourself.
seat belts fastened properly. Always in accordance to the vehicle speed
– Ensure that the air inside the
check that you and your passengers and traffic conditions.
passenger compartment is refreshed
have your seat belts fastened – Strictly follow the traffic regulations constantly.
correctly. existing in each country and above
– Never coast downhill with the
all, stay within the speed limits.
engine switched off: the braking
– Long trips should be undertaken in action requires greater effort on the
optimal physical condition. pedal due to the absence of the
5 engine brake and of the brake servo.
Drunk driving, or driving
under the influence of drugs
or certain medicines is
extremely dangerous for the driver
and for others.

176 Driving conditions

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 177 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Driving at night – Outside of densely-populated areas, Driving in fog


The main guidelines to follow when beware of animals crossing the road. If the fog is dense, avoid travelling
driving at night are set out below: where possible.
– Drive with particular caution: at
Driving in the rain When driving in mist, blanket fog or
night, driving conditions are more Rain and wet roads are dangerous. On when there is the possibility of banks
demanding. a wet road all the manoeuvres are of fog:
– Reduce your speed, especially on more difficult since wheel grip on the – Keep a moderate speed.
roads with no streetlights. asphalt is significantly reduced. This
– Even in the daytime, turn on the low
means that the braking distances
– At the first signs of drowsiness stop: beams, the front and rear fog lights.
increase considerably and the road
to continue driving would be a risk Do not use the high beams.
holding decreases.
for yourself and for others. Proceed Below are some advices for driving in – Remember that fog creates
only after you have had a rest. the rain: dampness on the asphalt and thus
– Keep the vehicle at a greater any type of manoeuvre is more
– Reduce your speed and keep a
distance from vehicles in front of you difficult and braking distances are
greater safety distance from the
than you would use during the day: it extended.
vehicles in front of you. High speed
is difficult to assess the speed of may result in a loss of control due to – Keep a safe distance from the vehicle
other vehicles when you can only see aquaplaning. in front of you. 5
the lights. – Avoid sudden changes in speed as
– Heavy rain also substantially reduces
– Check that the headlights are aimed visibility. In these circumstances, much as possible.
correctly: if they are too low, they even during the day, turn on the low – Whenever possible, avoid
reduce visibility and strain the eyes. beams, to be more visible to other overtaking.
If they are too high, they may bother drivers.
the drivers of other vehicles. – If you are forced to stop the vehicle
– Position the air conditioning and (breakdowns, impossibility of
– Use the high beams only outside of heating system controls for the proceeding due to poor visibility,
densely-populated areas and when demisting function, in order to avoid etc.), first of all, try to stop off of the
you are sure that they will not any visibility problems. travel lane. Then turn on the hazard
disturb other drivers. warning lights and, if possible, the
– Periodically check the conditions of
– When another vehicle is the windscreen wiper blades. low beams.
approaching, switch from high – Sound the horn rhythmically if you
beams (if on) to low beams. hear another vehicle approaching.
– Keep lights and headlights clean.

Driving conditions 177

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 178 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Driving in the mountains Driving on snow or ice – Avoid sudden acceleration and sharp
On downhill roads, use the engine Below are some general advice for changes in direction.
brake, engaging low gears so as not to driving in these conditions: – During the winter season, even
overheat the brakes. – Maintain a very moderate speed. apparently dry roads can have icy
– Never coast downhill with the sections. Be careful when crossing
– Fit snow chains or specific tyres if the bridges, viaducts and roads that
engine off or in neutral, and never road is covered with snow: see the
with the ignition key removed. have little exposure to the sun and
chapters "Snow chains" and "Winter are bordered by trees and rocks.
– Drive at a moderate speed, avoid tyres" in this section. They may be icy.
"cutting" corners. – Mainly use the engine brake and – Keep an ample safe distance from
– Remember that passing other avoid sharp braking. the vehicles in front of you.
vehicles when driving uphill is slower – We recommend you activate the
and thus requires more free distance “Low grip” mode (see page 160).
on the road. If you are being
overtaken on a hill, slow down and
allow the other vehicle to pass.

178 Driving conditions

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 179 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Air quality control devices Always use unleaded fuel. During normal operation, the
If starting is difficult, do not make catalytic converter generates
prolonged attempts. high temperatures. Do not,
Even if the vehicle is fitted with air
Especially avoid push starts, towing or therefore, park the vehicle on
quality devices, the environment flammable materials (grass, dry
hill starts: these are all manoeuvers
deserves the utmost respect from every leaves, pine needles, etc.): risk of fire.
that can damage the catalytic mufflers.
one of us.
For any emergency starting, only use
By following a few simple rules, the Do not install heat guards and do not
an auxiliary battery.
driver can avoid damaging the remove those already fitted to the
When driving, if the engine starts
environment and very often can catalytic converter and to the exhaust
"running poorly", continue driving,
reduce fuel consumption as well. manifold.
but reduce the engine performance
In this regard, some useful information Do not spray anything on the catalytic
required to a minimum and contact
is listed here below; please read the converter, Lambda sensor and exhaust
the Maserati Service Network as soon
following carefully. manifold.
as possible.
The correct operation of the air quality
Never run the engine, even if only for
devices not only guarantees respect for Failure to comply with these
testing, with one or more spark plugs
the environment, but also affects rules can originate fire
disconnected.
vehicle efficiency.
So, keeping these devices in good
Do not warm up the engine making it hazards. 5
idle before starting off, apart from
working conditions is the first rule for
when the external temperature is very
driving both ecologically sound and
low and, even then, for no longer than
economically.
30 seconds.
The first precaution is to follow the
Service Time Schedule scrupulously.

Air quality control devices 179

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 180 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Other advices – If the vehicle is stopped for long


– Do not warm up the engine with the periods, turn the engine off.
vehicle stationary: in these – Check tyre pressure regularly: if the
conditions the engine heats up much pressure is too low, fuel
more slowly and increases fuel consumption increases and the tyres
consumption and emissions. It is get damaged.
much better to move off slowly, – Do not transport unnecessary objects
avoiding high engine speeds. left in the luggage compartment.
– As soon as traffic conditions and the The weight of the vehicle affects fuel
route permit it, use a higher gear. consumption considerably.
– Avoid pressing the accelerator – Use the electrical devices only as
repeatedly when stopped at traffic long as necessary. The power
lights or before turning off the required increases fuel consumption.
engine.
– Keep your speed as even as possible,
avoiding unnecessary braking and
5 accelerations, which cause fuel
wastage and markedly increase
exhaust emissions.

180 Air quality control devices

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 181 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Parking Electric parking brake pressing the button A on the


The vehicle is equipped with an dashboard.
Pull the handbrake, straighten the automatic parking brake, referred to
Always hold the brake pedal
wheels and switch off the engine. as EPB (Electric Parking Brake).
depressed during
Never leave the ignition key in the It is automatically engaged when the
engagement or
MAR position. engine is turned off and it is
disengagement of the parking brake.
Always remove the key when getting disengaged when, with the engine
out of the vehicle. running, the accelerator pedal is
WARNING: When you need to park the
depressed.
vehicle on a steep slope, both with the
Never leave children When the parking brake is applied, the
engine on and off, it is recommended
unattended in the vehicle. warning light comes on and the
not only engage the parking brake but
message EPB ON is displayed.
also to shift the gearshift lever to P
During engagement and
(PARK) before leaving the vehicle.
disengagement procedures, the
Do not park the vehicle on
warning light flashes until the
paper, grass, dry leaves or Pressing the EPB button while
parking brake has reached its driving will cause the vehicle
other flammable materials.
maximum activation force and until it
They could catch fire if they come into
is fully released, respectively.
to slow down with a sharp 5
contact with hot parts of the exhaust deceleration (Dynamic Braking). We
In the above mentioned conditions, therefore recommend that you use
system.
the automatic engagement function this feature only in the event of an
can be deactivated/activated by emergency. In any case, vehicle
Do not leave the engine
running with the vehicle stability is ensured by the MSP system,
unattended. which is always active.

Parking 181

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 182 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Engagement Disengagement Deactivating PARK OFF automatic


The parking brake is automatically The parking brake is automatically operation
engaged when the engine is turned off disengaged by depressing the brake To deactivate automatic operation of
and the vehicle is stationary. pedal and moving the gearshift lever the parking brake, start the engine
It can only be disengaged when the from position P (a pressure of at least 5 and press the button A on the
engine is restarted. bar must be generated inside the dashboard. The message PARK OFF
If the key has been removed or is in braking system), or by pushing the appears on the display for 5 seconds,
position STOP, it cannot be accelerator pedal with a gear after which it remains displayed in
disengaged. engaged. smaller letters.
The parking brake can also be When the vehicle is moving or the key To reactivate automatic operation,
manually engaged when the vehicle is is in the MAR position, the parking press the button B again and the
moving or the key is in the MAR brake can also be manually message PARK ON will be displayed for
position, by raising the lever B. disengaged by pulling the lever B 5 seconds.
If the engine was turned off when the upward and simultaneously depressing
automatic engagement device was the service brake pedal.
deactivated, its operation can be
resumed simply by pulling the lever B WARNING: If you attempt to
5 upward. The message EPB ON will be disengage the parking brake without
displayed. having depressed the service brake
pedal, a message will be displayed to
Always check that the vehicle warn you to do so.
is actually locked before
leaving it. WARNING: In certain conditions, it is
however advisable to disengage the
parking brake manually and slightly
apply the service brake for starting off.
This is advisable when there are
obstacles very close to the vehicle in
the direction in which you intend to A
move.

182 Parking

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 183 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

WARNING: In certain conditions when Maserati Service Network is Emergency disengagement


the battery voltage is low, the electric displayed, drive slowly and In the event that the electric parking
parking brake system may temporarily remember that the electric parking brake locks with a total system failure,
be deactivated for safety reasons. brake device is not functioning. you need to manually release the
Therefore, typically upon starting the – Excessive temperature. parking brake using the special tool
engine, when the battery voltage drops, If the vehicle has been stationary provided in the toolkit.
the message PARK OFF may temporarily (key to STOP) for about 15 minutes To do this, proceed as follows:
be displayed, indicating that automatic without using the parking brake, – Remove the panel that covers the
operation is temporarily disabled. and the warning light illuminates spare wheel compartment in the
again after restarting the engine, luggage compartment.
WARNING: In case of performance starts,
slowly drive to the nearest Service – Remove the cap on the right-hand side
check that the electric parking brake is
Centre of the Maserati Service of the EPB ECU.
deactivated.
Network. – Insert the special tool in its seat.
Malfunction indication If the parking brake failure is
– Turn the handle clockwise until
accompanied by the message
In the event of electric parking brake release.
"Mechanical release only", follow
system failures, the warning light ! – Remove the tool from its seat and close
the manual emergency deactivation
on the display will come on. it with the cap.
procedure in order to release the
Depending on the message displayed,
parking brake. After each manual emergency 5
it signals the following failures of the release, the electric parking
EPB system: – Parking brake system overhaul.
brake system remains
The EPB system requires
– Parking brake failure. inefficient and must be repaired by the
maintenance, therefore contact a
If the message warning you to go to Maserati Service Network to resume
Service Centre of the Maserati
the nearest Service Centre of the operation.
Service Network to have the system
corrected.
In the event of an EPB failure,
take your vehicle to the
nearest Maserati Service
Network Centre as soon as possible.

Parking 183

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 184 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Tyres Winter tyres The specific features of the winter


These tyres are specially designed for tyres lead to lower performance under
driving on snow and ice and are fitted normal environmental conditions or
Tyre inflation pressure when on long highway trips, compared to
cold to replace the ones supplied with the
vehicle. the standard tyres.
The tyre inflating ratings shown in this Therefore, their use should be limited
manual must be read as values to the performance for which they
Only use winter tyres having
applicable with cold tyres. have been type-approved.
the same dimensions as those
provided with the vehicle or
The maximum speed Fit identical (manufacturer
as indicated on page 232.
reachable with winter tyres is and tread) tyres on all four
indicated by the tyre wheels, in order to ensure
The Maserati Service Network is
manufacturer. Always comply with the safe driving, braking and good
available to provide suggestions as to
regulations in force in the Country you manoeuvrability.
the types of tyres most suited to the
are driving in.
use foreseen by the Customer.
Remember that the direction
For the type of tyres to use, inflation
When using the spare wheel of tyre rotation should not be
pressures and relative specifications
5 (emergency wheel) do not
for winter tyres, carefully follow the
reversed.
exceed 80 km/h (50 mph).
indications found in the section
Avoid driving at full throttle, braking
"Capacities and technical
sharply and cornering at high speeds.
specifications".
The features of these tyres are
markedly reduced in winter when
tread depth is less than 4 mm. In this
case, they should be replaced.

184 Tyres

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 185 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Snow chains WARNING: Before purchasing or using Useful accessories to keep


snow chains, we recommend that you
The use of snow chains is subject to the on-board
to contact the Maserati Service
regulations in force in each country.
Network for information.
Use snow chains of reduced
Regardless of the legal provisions in
dimensions, with a maximum
WARNING: Keep a moderate speed force, we would recommend that you
protrusion of 9 mm (0.4 in) beyond the
when chains are fitted on the tyres. Do keep in the vehicle:
tyre tread.
not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph). Avoid – first aid kit containing alcohol-free
The chains should be fitted only on the
holes in the road, do not drive over disinfectant, sterile gauze pads,
driving wheel tyres (rear wheels).
steps or sidewalks and do not drive on gauze rolls, bandages, etc. (it is
Check the chain tension after driving
long stretches without snow. This will fitted on vehicles manufactured for
for a distance of about 50 meters with
prevent damage to the vehicle and the the German market);
the chains fitted.
roadbed.
Deactivation of the MSP system is – flashlight;
advised when chains are fitted on the – blunt-tipped scissors;
tyres. Press the MSP-OFF button, the
– heavy-duty gloves.
LED on the same button will be on.
The objects described and other
essential objects can be obtained from 5
the Maserati Service Network.
Snow chains: brand/type
Konig/SUPER MAGIC

Rear tyre
285/40 ZR18

Useful accessories to keep on-board 185

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap6_FOTO.fm Page 186 Friday, May 30, 2008 2:24 PM

186

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap6_FOTO.fm Page 187 Friday, May 30, 2008 2:24 PM

In an emergency

Emergency start 188


Toolkit 189
If a tyre gets a puncture 190
If an exterior light goes out 197
If an interior light goes out 200
If a fuse blows 203
If the battery is flat 214
If you have to jack up the vehicle 215
If you have to tow the vehicle 216
In the event of an accident 217

187

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 188 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Emergency start 4) As soon as the displayed number of If the EOBD warning light remains
flashing is equal to the first digit of on, turn the key to the STOP position
your CODE CARD, depress the and repeat the procedure from step 1.
If the MASERATI CODE fails to disable
accelerator and keep it pressed This procedure can be repeated an
the engine immobiliser, the warning
down until the EOBD warning unlimited number of times.
light CODE will light up with a
light goes off, after being lit on for
fixed light, the EOBD warning
approximately 4 seconds; you can WARNING: After an emergency start,
light will go out after four seconds and
now release the accelerator pedal. we recommend that you contact the
then will come on immediately and the
5) The EOBD warning light starts Maserati Service Network as the
engine will not start. To start the emergency procedure must be then
engine, it is necessary to follow the flashing again. As soon as the
displayed number of flashing is carried out each time the vehicle is
emergency start procedure. started.
equal to the second digit of your
WARNING: We recommend that you CODE CARD, press down the
carefully read the entire procedure accelerator pedal and keep it
before carrying it out. If you make a pressed.
mistake, you should turn the ignition 6) Proceed in the same manner for the
key to STOP and repeat the operations remaining digits in the code on the
from the beginning (step 1). CODE CARD.
7) When the last digit has been
1) Read the 5-digit electronic code entered, keep the accelerator pedal
6 found on the CODE CARD. pressed down. The EOBD
2) Turn the ignition key to MAR: at this warning light comes on for 4
moment the CODE and EOBD seconds and then goes off; you can
warning lights are on. now release the accelerator pedal.
3) Press the accelerator pedal down 8) A quick flashing of the EOBD
and keep it pressed. Approximately warning light (about 4 seconds)
8 seconds later, the EOBD confirms that the operation has
warning light goes off. Release the been carried out correctly.
accelerator and get ready to count 9) Start the engine turning the key
the number of times the EOBD from MAR to AVV.
warning light flashes.

188 Emergency start

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 189 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Toolkit The toolkit, housed under the floor


panel, contains:
The vehicle is equipped with the – 8 + 10 mm open end wrenches
following tools: – 13 + 17 mm open end wrenches
– toolkit, located in the luggage – double slot + cross-head screwdriver
compartment – tow hook
– tyre repair kit – tool for electric parking brake
– reflecting triangle actuator release.
– box with electric compressor, jack
and tools for fitting the spare wheel
(optional), located inside the spare
wheel itself.

Toolkit 189

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 190 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

If a tyre gets a puncture sockets housed in the ashtray, then fit WARNING: If the minimum pressure
the coupling E. can not be reached, do not drive the
Start the vehicle engine vehicle; contact the nearest Maserati
Precautions in the event of a (see page 152). Service Network.
puncture Press the Fix&Go power switch F to the
If a tyre is punctured, you can make a “I” position. The electric compressor When the correct pressure has been
first emergency repair using the special will be turned on, sealant and air will reached, start driving the vehicle to
Fix&Go kit located in the trunk. inflate the tyre. uniformly distribute the sealant inside
Tyre punctures of up to 6 mm Minimum 1.8 bar (26 psi) of pressure the tyre.
(7/32 inch) can be repaired; the kit can should be reached within 20 minutes. After 10 minutes, stop and check the
be used in all weather conditions. If the pressure has not been reached tyre pressure. If the pressure is below
Do not remove the foreign object from turn off and remove the Fix&Go, drive 1.3 bar (19 psi), do not drive the
the punchured tyre, i.e., screw or nail. the vehicle 10 meters (30 feet) back vehicle, as the tyre is too damaged,
Remove the special Fix&Go kit from and forth, to better distribute the contact the nearest Maserati Service
the vehicle, take it out from the bag sealant inside the tyre. Network.
and place it near the punchured tyre. Attach the clear flexible filling tube of If the pressure is at 1.3 bar (19 psi) or
Screw the flexible vacuum filling hose the compessor directly to the tyre valve above repeat the inflation process to
A onto the pneumatic valve B. Remove and repeat the inflation process. reach the correct tyre pressure and
the cap C from the power socket continue driving.
positioned in the luggage
6 compartment or remove the cigarette
lighter D from one of two power

E
B D

D
A
E C E

190 If a tyre gets a puncture

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 191 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Peel off the warning label G from the The sealant maybe harmful or WARNING: The sealant contained in
bottle and place it on the dashboard as irritant. Do not swallow, avoid the bottle in the Fix&Go kit may
a reminder to the driver that the tyre contact with eyes & skin. In damage the sensor fitted inside the
has been treated with Fix&Go. case of contact rinse with plenty of wheel rim on vehicles equipped with
water. the tyre pressure monitoring system. In
Do not drive over the speed Contact a physician in case of allergic these cases, always have the sensor
limit or exceed 110 km/h reaction. Keep the sealant away from replaced by the Maserati Service
(65 mph) whichever is less. children. Dispose of the used sealant Network.
Have the tyre checked as soon as canister at your local Maserati Service
possible at a Maserati Service Network.
Network.
WARNING: Replace the sealant
canister prior to the expiration date at
your Maserati Service Network.

F G

If a tyre gets a puncture 191

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 192 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Spare wheel (emergency wheel - – Select P (PARK), then turn the key to – a wrench I for the wheel studs and
optional) position STOP. for the jack operation
– If necessary, turn on the hazard – a bushing J, to be fitted on the
With the spare wheel fitted, warning lights and position the wrench to slacken the wheel studs
never exceed the maximum warning triangle at the prescribed and to operate the jack
speed of 80 km/h (50 mph); distance.
when this limit is exceeded, the MSP – a jack K.
system deactivates, consequently WARNING: In the event of downhill or
jeopardising the vehicle's stability, WARNING: If the vehicle is equipped
uneven roads, place wedges or other
road holding and braking. Avoid with a spare wheel, the repair kit is not
objects under the wheels, in order to
accelerating at full throttle, braking provided.
hold the vehicle.
sharply and cornering at high speeds. – Open the compressor cover and take
out the pipe with the pressure gauge
– Free the bag and remove it from the
On request, the vehicle can be fitted L and the with connector M for the
luggage compartment.
with a spare wheel (emergency wheel), power plug.
jack and tools for wheel replacement. Remove the spare wheel using the
– Unscrew the spare wheel's valve cap
The spare wheel is of a special type and jack, the compressor and the tools for
and screw down the inflation pipe
is housed in the luggage wheel replacement.
union N on the valve.
compartment. The spare wheel is The box located inside the spare wheel
supplied deflated, for space-saving contains:
– an electric compressor H, including a
6 reasons, with an electric compressor to
pressure gauge and the union for
inflate it.
If a tyre is punctured, proceed as inflating the spare wheel
follows:
– Stop the vehicle in safe place, where
O N
it does not represent a hazard H I
situation for the road traffic and
where the wheel can be replaced
safely. The vehicle must be parked
on a level and firm ground. L
J
M
– Check that the electric parking brake
is applied. K

192 If a tyre gets a puncture

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 193 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

– Remove the cap P from power socket WARNING: We recommend that you WARNING: The current plug is
positioned in the luggage check the tyre pressure on the gauge powered only when the key is turned
compartment or remove the when the compressor is off, in order to to MAR and it can only be connected
cigarette lighter Q from one of the have a more accurate reading. to devices with a power absorption of
power sockets housed in the ashtray, 15A maximum (180W power). Do not
then fit the coupling M. WARNING: Do not activate the connect devices with a higher power
– Turn the ignition key to MAR to compressor for over 20 minutes: risk of absorption to the current plug. A
supply power to the plug and overheating! The compressor has been prolonged power absorption can
activate the compressor by pressing designed for inflating the spare wheel discharge the battery, preventing the
switch O. only; do not use it to inflate engine from being started once again.
mattresses, rubber boats etc.
– Stop the compressor when the
pressure gauge L indicates 2.2 bar – Fit the bushing J onto the wrench I
(220 kPa – 31.9 psi) and screw on the and slacken the 5 fastening studs on
cap on the valve. the wheel to be replaced by about
one turn.

If a tyre gets a puncture 193

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 194 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

– Take out the jack from the box and – Place the jack near the wheel to be – Make sure that the jack head is
open it partially. replaced, in one of the indicated properly fitted into one of the
positions. special seats on the side member.

Failure to position the jack


correctly could result in the
vehicle dropping and
damages to its body when raised.

~25 cm ~20 cm

194 If a tyre gets a puncture

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 195 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

– Insert the wrench onto the jack and – Turn the jack wrench to lower the car With the spare wheel fitted,
rotate it until the wheel rises a few and withdraw the jack. never exceed the maximum
centimetres off the ground. – Fully tighten the studs as shown in speed of 80 km/h (50 mph); in
– Back off the 5 studs completely and the illustration, starting first with fact, exceeding this speed jeopardizes
remove the wheel. one stud and then with the one the vehicle's stability, road holding
diametrically opposed and so on. and braking. Avoid accelerating at full
– Fit the spare wheel, fixing it with the
throttle, braking sharply and
5 screws just removed.
The spare wheel is narrower cornering at high speeds.
WARNING: The spare wheel must be than the standard ones and
must be used only to travel The inflating pressure for the
mounted using the screws that fix the
the necessary distance to reach a spare wheel must be 2.2 bar
standard wheels.
service station, where the punctured (220 kPa - 31.9 psi).
tyre can be repaired.
For safety reasons, it is
absolutely forbidden to travel
with more than one spare
wheel fitted on the vehicle at the same
time.

Snow chains cannot be fitted


on spare wheels. 6
The maximum total life of the
spare wheel is 3,000 km
(1,860 mi).

3
1 5

4 2

If a tyre gets a puncture 195

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 196 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Refitting the standard wheel Observe the tightening After refitting the standard
torque for the wheel studs wheel, check the tyre
– Following the procedure described
(98 ± 10 Nm). pressure.
before, lift the car and remove the
spare wheel.
On completion of the operation: The jack can be used only to
– Fit the standard wheel. replace the wheels. It should
– Thoroughly deflate the spare wheel,
– Screw down the studs using the exerting pressure on the valve never be used for repairs
special wrench. through the protruding piece of the under the vehicle.
– Lower the vehicle and withdraw the valve cap.
jack. – Position the jack and the wrench
– Fully tighten the studs following the with the bushing in their box and put
sequence indicated before. it back into the spare wheel.
– Place the spare wheel into its bag
and secure it inside the luggage
compartment.

The used wheel may soil the


mats: protect them if possible.

196 If a tyre gets a puncture

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 197 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

If an exterior light goes On the vehicles manufactured for the Taillight clusters
Japanese market, the DRL lights are The taillight bulbs are arranged as
out not operational; for all the other follows:
markets where by law they may not be
WARNING: Before replacing a light turned on, they can be deactivated G – Direction indicator light bulb
bulb, make sure that the through the Multi Media System H – Position light bulb
corresponding fuse is intact. For C – Side-marker light bulb J – Stop light LED
replacement, use only genuine new K – Reverse light bulb
D – High beam light bulb
light bulbs having the same
characteristics as the bulb to be E – Direction indicator LED L – Rear fog light bulb
replaced. F – Fog light bulb M – Side-marker LED

Headlight clusters To replace the Xenon light


To access the headlight clusters from bulbs, the low and high beam
underneath the vehicle, you must first light bulbs and to check the
remove the wheel housing covering. system, contact the Maserati Service
The light bulbs of the headlight Network only: RISK OF ELECTRICAL
clusters are arranged as follows: SHOCKS!
A – Bi-xenon low-beam/high-beam
Due to the complexity of the
bulb
B – Position and DRL light bulb.
operation, we recommend that you 6
contact the Maserati Service Network
for the replacement of all of the light
bulbs.
A B
G H

C K J

L
E F D
M

If an exterior light goes out 197

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 198 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

To replace a light bulb: Direction indicator side lights 2) Take out the rear part of the
1) Lift the luggage compartment lid. indicator by releasing the retaining
To replace the lateral direction
2) Open the door on the covering tab Q and remove the unit.
indicator light bulb (5W):
panel, in position with the light 3) Remove the bulb holder R turning it
1) Push the direction indicator forward
cluster. in an anti-clockwise direction.
to press the spring clip P.
3) Pull the bulb holder N and remove it.
4) Remove the light bulb O and replace
it.
5) Refit the bulb holder N in its seat.
6) Close the door on the covering
panel.

N O
1
2
Q

R
198 If an exterior light goes out

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 199 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

4) Remove and replace the bulb S. Third stop light Number plate lights
5) Refit the bulb holder turning it in a In order to replace the bulbs, the To replace the number plate light bulb
clockwise direction. optical unit has to be removed. It is (C 5W):
6) Refit the direction indicator therefore recommended that you 1) Back off the fastening screws for the
inserting first the retaining tab on contact the Maserati Service Network. transparent cover/bulb holder unit.
the rear part and then pressing the
2) Remove the unit and replace the
front part until hearing the spring
bulb.
clip click in place.

WARNING: Proceed with care when


removing the side direction indicator
light, to avoid damages to the car body
or to the indicator itself.

If an exterior light goes out 199

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 200 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

If an interior light goes 3) Refit the dome lamp inserting first Courtesy mirror light
the front side and the pushing the To replace the bulb (12V - 5W
out rear side into its seat. “torpedo” type):
WARNING: Before replacing a bulb, WARNING: When refitting the dome 1) Remove the fixing frame by levering
ensure that the matching fuse is intact. light, make sure that the electric wires it out gently at points D.
For replacement, use only original new are correctly positioned and do not 2) Replace the bulb.
light bulbs having the same interfere with the dome light edges 3) Refit the frame by pressing it.
characteristics as the bulb to be and with the retaining tabs.
replaced.

Front and rear dome light


To replace the bulbs:
1) Use a screwdriver to gently lever it
out at points A and remove the
dome light.
2) Replace the bulb concerned by
rotating it:
– timed light B
6 – reading lights C.

A A B

C D
D

200 If an interior light goes out

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 201 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Glove compartment, glove box 2) Raise the cover F. 3) Replace the light bulb G.
and luggage compartment light 4) Refit the cover, inserting first the
To replace the bulb: two-tab side and then pressing on the
1) Remove the transparent cover by other side.
levering it out gently at point E with a
screwdriver.

E
F

If an interior light goes out 201

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 202 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Courtesy lights (below door) 2) Rotate the bulb holder L and take it 4) Refit the bulb holder L inserting first
To replace the bulb: out. the electrical connector side and
3) Replace the pressure-fitted bulb M. then pressing on the other side to
1) Use a screwdriver positioned at
hook up the clip.
point H to lever out the light fixing
frame.

L
M
H

202 If an interior light goes out

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 203 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

If a fuse blows Replace the faulty fuse with a new one Position of fuses/relays
featuring the same rating (same
The fuses/relays are located in various
colour).
Replacing the fuses parts of the vehicle, namely:
If the fault recurs, consult the Maserati
When an electrical device is not Service Network. – On the right hand side of the
functioning, check that the luggage compartment.
corresponding fuse is in proper Never replace a blown fuse – Behind the glove compartment, to
working order (intact). with anything other than a the left of the steering wheel.
A - Fuse intact. sound fuse (same rating/ – On the right hand side of the
B - Fuse blown. colour). luggage compartment

Fuse colours
A B
dark light
brown red yellow white green
yellow blue

Ampere A5 A7.5 A10 A15 A20 A25 A30

Maxi Fuse colours 6


yellow green orange red blue

Ampere A20 A30 A40 A50 A60

If a fuse blows 203

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 204 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Fuses and relays in the engine The fuses/relays are housed in 3 control The list of fuses and relays is shown in
compartment boxes. the following pages.
To access the fuses/relays, lift the
engine compartment lid, remove the WARNING: If you need to wash the
covering panel A, then undo the 4 engine compartment, do not direct the
screws B to remove the cover C. jet of water for too long directly on the
engine compartment ECU.

F92
F91
F90
F89
F88
T15

F97
F96
F95
F94
F93
T20 T17
T19 T14
F11
F17
F22
F08
F85
T10
T05
T09
T08
T31
6 T03
T07 T06 T30 T02

A C
F07
F01
F04
F05
F06
F83
F03
F82
F81
F02
F19
F14
F10
F15
F18
F23
F30
F21
F09
F84
F20
F16
F24
F87

B
F102
F101
F100
F99
F98

T16
F107
F106
F105
F104
F103

204 If a fuse blows

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 205 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Engine compartment relay


Pos. Type Function
T02 Micro 20 A DRL relay
T03 Micro 20 A Spot light relay
T05 Micro 20 A CLA relay
T06 Micro 20 A Horns relay
T07 Maxi 50 A I.E. main relay
T08 Micro 20 A Air conditioning system compressor relay
T09 Micro 20 A High-beam relay
T10 Micro 20 A Glove compartment motor relay
T14 Micro 20 A Fog light relay
T15 Maxi 50 A Radiator electric fan - 1st speed relay
T16 Maxi 50 A Radiator electric fan - 2n speed relay
T17 Micro 30 A Immobilizer relay (only Quattroporte version)
T19 Micro 20 A Ignition enable relay
6
T20 Micro 30 A Ignition relay
T30 Maxi 50 A Air pump relay
T31 Micro 30 A Headlight washer pump relay

Engine compartment fuses


Pos. Amp. Colours System / Component
F01 Maxi 40 A Orange +30 relay - fan 1
F02 Maxi 30 A Green +30 ABS valves
F03 Maxi 20 A Yellow +30 Relay T03 spot lights
F04 Maxi 40 A Orange +30 ABS pump
If a fuse blows 205

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 206 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Pos. Amp. Colours System / Component


F05 Maxi 40 A Orange +30 A.C. Node
F06 Maxi 60 A Blue +30 relay - fan 2
F07 30 A Green +30 relay T07 - I.E. main
F08 7.5 A Brown +30 relay T08 - Air conditioner compressor
F09 7.5 A Brown +30 relay T05 - CLA
F10 15 A Light blue +30 Relay T06 - Horns
F11 10 A Red LH high beam
F14 7.5 A Brown NQS
F15 15 A Light blue +30 alternator sensing
F16 10 A Red LH spot light power supply
F17 10 A Red RH high beam
F18 7.5 A Brown +30 I.E. bank
F19 15 A Light blue +30 relay T02 - DRL lights
F20 15 A Light blue +30 relay T10 - Glove compartment motor
6
F21 15 A Light blue +30 relay T14 - Fog lights
F22 - -
F23 10 A Red +30 ABS electronics
F24 10 A Red RH spot light power supply
F30 30 A Green +30 Relay T20 - Ignition
F81 Maxi 50 A Red CPL2
F82 - -
F83 Maxi 50 A Red +30 Air pump relay
F84 20 A Yellow +30 Ignition switch

206 If a fuse blows

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 207 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Pos. Amp. Colours System / Component


F85 30 A Green Headlight washer power supply
F87 - -
F88 15 A Light blue +main relay, injectors/cylinder coils 1-4
F89 15 A Light blue +main relay, injectors/cylinder coils 5-8
F90 15 A Light blue +main relay I.E. secondary connected devices
F91 10 A Red +main relay, I.E. ECU
F92 15 A Light blue +main relay, oxygen sensors
F93 7.5 A Brown INT roof inside panel utilities
F94 7.5 A Brown INT NCS
F95 7.5 A Brown INT CSG
F96 7.5 A Brown INT alternator
F97 10 A Red INT I.E. ECU
F98 - -
F99 - -
6
F100 - -
F101 - -
F102 - -
F103 - -
F104 - -
F105 - -
F106 - -
F107 - -

If a fuse blows 207

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 208 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Fuses and relays in the passenger The fuses/relays are housed in 2 control The list of fuses and relays is shown in
compartment, to the left of the boxes. the following pages.
steering wheel
To access the fuses/relays, open the
glove compartment D and undo the 2
screws E.

F-36 F-52 F-45 F-46 F-34


F-39 F-41 F-47 F-33 F-48
F-38 F-43 F-32 F-37 F-49
6 F-53 F-40 F-50 F-42 F-35
F-31 F-44 F-51 F-12 F-13

T12
T01
E T13
T11

208 If a fuse blows

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 209 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Relays in the passenger compartment, to the left of the steering wheel


Pos. Type Function
T01 Micro-relay 20A Low beams
T11 Micro-relay 30A Heated rear window
T12 Micro-relay 30A Connected devices 1 (Controlled by INT/A Ignition switch)
T13 Maxi-relay 50A Connected devices 2 (Controlled by BC Body Computer)

Fuses inside the passenger compartment, to the left of the steering wheel
Pos. Amp. Colour System / Component
F12 15A Light blue Right-hand low beam
F13 15A Light blue Left-hand low beam/CAF (Headlights ECU) enable
F31 7.5A Brown INT/A For A.C. unit, NBC (Body Computer Node)
F32 10A Red Rear dome lights, Step lights, Luggage compartment lights, Front dome light
F33 20A Yellow NVB (Luggage compartment node) Power supply 1
F34 20A Yellow NVB 2 (Luggage compartment node) Power supply 2
6
+15 SCC (Cruise Control Satellite), NAC (Cruise Control Adaptive Node), CLA (Stop lights
F35 7.5A Brown
Control ) (NC)
F36 10A Red +30 (Preset position)
+15 CLA (Stop lights Control) (NA), third stop, NQS (Instrument Panel Node), CAF
F37 10A Red
(Headlights ECU)
F38 15A Light blue Reverse lights
+30 for NIM (Inside roof node), Multi Media System (IT node), NCL (Air conditioning and
F39 10A Red heating system node), EOBD Diagnostics socket, CSA (Alarm system siren ECU), CAV
(Motion-sensing alarm ECU)
F40 30A Green Heated rear window

If a fuse blows 209

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 210 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Pos. Amp. Colour System / Component


F41 15A Light blue Windscreen/rear window washer nozzles, heated windscreen (Preset position)
F42 7.5 Brown +15 NFR (Brake system node)
F43 30A Green Windscreen wiper/washer (Connected Devices Relay INT/A)
Cigarette lighter - Power socket inside Luggage compartment, Dashboard Power Socket
F44 20A Yellow
(connected devices' relay INT/A)
F45 25A White Electromagnets for Headrest Recline
F46 15A Light blue Rear window Sunshade Motor
F47 20A Yellow NPG Power Supply (Driver's door node)
F48 20A Yellow NPP Power Suppy (Passenger's door node)
+15 for NVO (Steering wheel node), NCS (Suspensions Control Node), NSP (Parking
Sensors Node), CSG (Power steering ECU), NTV (TV node), CSP (Twilight/rain sensor
F49 7.5A Brown
ECU), Internal Mirror, NIM (Inside roof node), LH Multi Media System Control panel (IT
node), LH Control panel on dashboard, AQS, Fog Sensor, CTA (Sunroof ECU)
F50 7.5A Brown Airbag system

6 F51 7.5A Brown +15 windscreen wiper controls, NCA (automatic gearbox node)
F52 15A Light blue Front Seats heating (Connected Devices Relay INT/A)
F53 10A Red Rear fog lights

210 If a fuse blows

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 211 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Relay/fuse boxes inside the There are 2 relay and fuse boxes. To access the fuses and relays inside the
luggage compartment control boxes, remove the covers by
To access the fuses/relays, open the levering up the fastening tabs.
covering panel F on the right-hand side
of the luggage compartment, levering
up the fastening tabs G.

F54 F55
F63 F57
F56
T21 F67
F62
F60
F69
F77
6
F78 T22 T24 F79
F61 F58
T34 T35
F65 F68
G F F66 T23 T25 F59
F80 F64
T32 T33

F27 F53
F26 F29
F25 F28

If a fuse blows 211

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 212 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Relays inside the luggage


compartment
Pos. Type Function
T21 Maxi 50 A Rear connected devices relay
T22 - -
T23 Micro 20 A Side marker relay
T24 Micro 20 A Third stop relay
T25 Micro 20 A Fuel tank door relay
T32 Micro 30 A Key-Lock solenoid
T33 Micro 30 A Rear seat heating
T34 Micro 30 A Fuel pump 1
T35 Micro 30 A Fuel pump 2

Fuses inside the luggage compartment


Pos. Amp. Colour System / Component
6 F25 10 A Red +30 T32 key-lock solenoid
F26 20 A Yellow +30 T33 rear seat heating
F27 20 A Yellow +30 T34, T35 fuel pumps
F28 - -
F29 - -
F53 - -
F54 30 A Green +30 Hi-Fi amplifier
F55 30 A Green Driver’s seat movement (from T21)
F56 10 A Red +30 NAG, NTV, Bose tuner, NIT (Japan)
F57 30 A Green Passenger seat movement (from T21)

212 If a fuse blows

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 213 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Pos. Amp. Colour System / Component


F58 7.5 A Brown Front LH, rear RH side marker power supply from T23
F59 - -
F60 7.5 A Brown +30 NSP
F61 7.5 A Brown +30 T24 third stop
F62 20A Yellow +30 NCA
F63 15 A Light blue +30 fuel tank door T25 relay
F64 7.5 A Brown Front RH, rear LH side marker power supply from T23
F65 20 A Yellow +30 NPP, NPG, NVB locks
F66 20 A Yellow +30 sunroof
F67 30 A Green Rear LH seat movement (from T21)
F68 - -
F69 30 A Green Rear RH seat movement (from T21)
F77 20 A Yellow Power socket on armrest (from T21)
F78 20 A Yellow +30 power socket
6
F79 7.5 A Brown Rear seat movement (from T21)
F80 25 A White +30 bass box

If a fuse blows 213

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 214 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

If the battery is flat Recharging the battery 4) Switch on the recharger.


You are advised to recharge the 5) When the battery is recharged, turn
First of all, we recommend that you battery slowly and at a low amperage off the recharger before disconnecting
read the precautions contained in the for about 24 hours. it from the battery.
section ”Maintenance“ to prevent the Follow the below instructions: 6) Reconnect the terminals to the
battery from running flat and to 1) Deactivate the electronic alarm battery poles, observing the polarity.
ensure its long life. system using the remote control.
WARNING: First reconnect the positive
2) Open the luggage compartment
Starting with the auxiliary pole terminal (+) and then the
and remove the panel on the right-
battery hand side, then disconnect the electric
negative pole one (–).
See the chapter ”Starting the engine“ system terminals from the battery
The fluid contained in the
on page 152 in the section ”Using the poles.
battery is poisonous and
vehicle“.
corrosive. Avoid contact with
WARNING: First disconnect the
the skin and eyes. The battery
WARNING: Under no circumstance negative pole terminal (–) then the
recharging procedure must be carried
should a battery be used for an positive pole one (+).
out in a ventilated environment, away
emergency start: you could damage
from naked flames or possible sources
the electronic systems, particularly the 3) Connect the recharger cables to the of sparks: risk of explosion and fire.
control units which manage the battery poles.
6 ignition and fuel supply functions.

214 If the battery is flat

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 215 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

If you have to jack up the The jack can be used only to


replace the wheels. Under no
vehicle circumstance should it be used
for repairs under the vehicle.
Using the jack
See the chapter “If a tyre gets a
puncture”, in this section.

~25 cm ~20 cm

If you have to jack up the vehicle 215

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 216 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

If you have to tow the Tow the vehicle using the towing hook When towing the vehicle,
found in the toolkit. Screw the towing make sure that you observe
vehicle hook down tightly in its seat, on the the road traffic regulations
lower, right-hand side of the front concerning both the towing device
If you need to tow the vehicle, observe bumper. and driving conduct.
the following recommendations: In order to tow the vehicle, turn the
– if possible, have the vehicle key to MAR and engage neutral by When towing the vehicle with
transported on a vehicle specific for shifting the gearshift lever A to N. the engine off, remember
roadside assistance and recovery; If the electronic parking brake (EPB) is that, without the assistance of
applied, you must release it, see on the brake servo, a stronger effort is
if this is not possible:
page 181. required on the brake pedal for
– tow the vehicle by raising the driving braking and on the steering wheel for
wheels (rear); Do not extract the key, as the steering.
If also this solution is not practicable: steering wheel will lock
– tow the vehicle for a distance of less automatically and you will be Screw down the towing hook
than 100 km (62 mi) at a speed below unable to steer the wheels. into its seat (approx. 11 turns).
60 km/h (37 mph). Accurately clean the threaded
WARNING: If you have to tow the seat before tightening the hook.
vehicle with 2 wheels raised, ensure
that the ignition key is in the STOP
6 position. If this is not observed, when
the MSP is active, the ECU will store a
malfunction and the relative warning
light will illuminate on the
instrument panel display. This requires
the intervention of the Maserati
Service Network for resetting of the
system.

216 If you have to tow the vehicle

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 217 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

In the event of an accident In multiple accidents occurred on First aid kit


motorways, particularly where visibility Housed inside the luggage
It is important always to stay calm. is poor, there is a high risk of being compartment, this kit contains the
– If you are not directly involved, stop involved in other collisions. Leave your following:
at a distance of at least ten meters vehicle immediately and move away
from the area. – sterile gauze to cover and clean the
away from the accident area. wounds
– If you are on a motorway, stop
If there are injured persons – bandages of various size
without obstructing the emergency
lane. – Never leave the injured person – treated adhesive bandages of
alone. Persons not directly involved various sizes
– Turn off the engine and switch on
in the accident are also required to – an adhesive bandage strip
the hazard lights.
give assistance.
– At night, illuminate the accident – a pack of cotton wool
area with the headlights. – Do not crowd around injured
– a bottle of disinfectant
persons.
– Always act with caution: you should – a packet of paper cleaning tissues
not risk someone crashing into you. – Reassure the injured person that aids
are on the way and stay close to him/ – a pair of rounded-end scissors
– Indicate that an accident has
her to help with possible panic – tweezers
occurred by placing the emergency
attacks. – two haemostatic tubes.
triangle in a well visible position and
at the prescribed distance. – Release or cut the seat belts
– Call the emergency services, restraining the injured persons. 6
providing as much information as – Do not give the injured persons
possible. On the motorway, use the anything to drink.
special call boxes. – Never move an injured person.
– Remove the ignition key from the – Remove the injured person from the
vehicles involved. vehicle only if there is a risk of fire,
– If you smell fuel or other chemical sinking in water or falling down into
products, do not smoke and ask a pit. When removing an injured
people around you to put their person, do not pull his/her limbs,
cigarettes out. never bend his/her head and, as far
To extinguish fires, even small ones, use as possible, keep his/her body in a
a fire extinguisher, blankets, sand or horizontal position.
earth. Never use water.
In the event of an accident 217

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap7_FOTO.fm Page 218 Friday, May 30, 2008 2:27 PM

218

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap7_FOTO.fm Page 219 Friday, May 30, 2008 2:27 PM

Capacities and technical specifications

Fuel 220
Engine oil 220
Capacities: quantity and specifications of the products to use 221
Fuel consumption 223
CO2 exhaust emissions 224
Technical specifications 225
Tyre pressure 232

219

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 220 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Fuel Engine oil


Only use unleaded premium fuel with To check the level, please see the
an octane number (R.O.N.) of no less “Maintenance” section.
than 95. Do not top up with oil having
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 90 litres, characteristics other than those of the
including a 18 litre reserve. oil already used.
The gap between the MIN and MAX
WARNING: The anti-pollution devices reference marks on the dipstick
of the vehicle require unleaded fuel to corresponds to about 1.5 litres of oil.
be used at all times. Under no Use SAE 5W/40 API SL/CF and ACEA A3,
circumstance, not even in emergency B3, B4 oil for fuel-powered engines.
situations, should leaded fuel be
supplied to the fuel tank, not even a
minimum quantity. This would
irreparably damage the catalytic
converters.

WARNING: An inefficient catalytic


converter results in noxious exhaust
emissions which damage the
environment.
7

220 Fuel
Fuel/ Engine oil

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 221 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Capacities: quantity and specifications of the products to use

Capacities and recommended products


Version Version
Parts to be refilled Quattroporte Quattroporte S Product specifications
Quantity
Fuel tank approximately 90 litres Premium unleaded fuel with no less than 95 R.O.N.
(including low fuel sector)
Fuel reserve approximately 18 litres
Engine oil: Entirely synthetic multigrade lubricants SAE 5W/40 that
meet API SL/CF and ACEA A3, B3, B4 specifications.
Oil type Shell Helix Ultra 5W-40. API SM/CF approved by
Maserati.
- replace at regular intervals 9.0 litres
- top up from the MIN to the 1.5 litres WARNING: Do not top up with oil having characteristics
MAX level other than those of the oil already used.
WARNING: Engine oil consumption depends on the
driving style and the use of the vehicle.
Windscreen/headlight 6.5 litres Mix of water and detergent fluid, in the proportions
washer fluid tank indicated on the product package. 7
Detergent fluid: Mix of CUNA NC 956-II surfactants and
alcohols. Recommended type: DP1.
WARNING: If the temperature is below –20°C, use pure
detergent fluid.

Capacities: quantity and specifications of the products to use 221

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 222 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Version Version
Parts to be refilled Quattroporte Quattroporte S Product specifications
Quantity
Engine cooling circuit 13 litres Mix of water and coolant, in the proportions indicated on
the product package.
Coolant: inhibited monoethylene glycol-based protective
fluid with anti-freezing action: CUNA NC 956-16.
Type: Shell Glycoshell.
Hydraulic power steering - Oil type: ATF DEXRON II D LEV, SAE 10W.
Oil type: ATF Type A - MB 236.2 - ZF ML09/12
Shell Donax TM
Gearbox oil 10.03 litres Oil Type SHELL M1375.4 DEXTRON III
Differential oil 1 litre Oil type: SHELL SPIRAX S 75W140
Braking system - Synthetic fluid: NHTSA n.116 DOT4, ISO 4925, SAE J1703
J1704, CUNA NC 956-01.
SAE J1703, FMVSS No. 116 DOT4 and the ISO 4925.
Type: Shell Donax UB (DOT4 Ultra)
Air conditioning and 1,050 cc 600 gr R134a (version Quattroporte)
heating system coolant 60 gr +/- 30 gr 60 gr +/- 30 gr R134a PAG RL 897 (version Quattroporte S)
Air conditioning and
7 heating system compressor
125 cc Type: SP 10 (Sanden) (version Quattroporte)
200 ml +/- 10 ml Oil type: Ucon RL 897 (version Quattroporte S)
oil

222 Capacities: quantity and specifications of the products to use

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 223 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Fuel consumption
The fuel consumption values shown in Fuel consumption following the 2004/3/EC directive
the following table were established (litres per 100 km)
based on homologation tests
prescribed by specific European Urban Extra-urban Combined
Directives. Version Quattroporte 21.99 10.50 14.73
The test procedures adopted for fuel
consumption measuring are the Version Quattroporte S 23.95 10.91 15.71
following:
WARNING: The type of route, traffic and weather conditions, driving style,
– urban cycle: this test begins with a general condition of the vehicle, equipment/accessories in the vehicle, use of the
cold start, followed by simulation of air conditioning system, vehicle load and other items or situations which may
an urban route; negatively affect the vehicle aerodynamics or wind resistance lead to
– extra-urban cycle: this test involves consumption ratios differing from the indicated ones.
frequent accelerations in all gears,
simulating use of the vehicle on
routes outside urban areas; the
speed varies between 0 and 120 Km/
h;
– combined cycle: this is calculated by
considering a route consisting of
about 37% urban cycle and 63%
extra-urban cycle. 7

Fuel consumption 223

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 224 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

CO2 exhaust emissions


The CO2 exhaust emission ratings
shown in the following table refer to
an average fuel consumption. CO2 emissions according to (*) Directive 2004/3/EC (g/km)
Urban Extra-urban Combined
Version Quattroporte 514.9 246.1 345.0
Version Quattroporte S 561 256 365

224 CO 2 exhaust
CO2 exhaustemissions
emissions

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 225 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Technical specifications Injection – Ignition


The ignition and injection system is
Engine controlled by a single microprocessor
ECU. This enhances engine
Version Version performance, improving vehicle
General
Quattroporte Quattroporte S handling, and reduces fuel
Type code M139 A M139 R consumption, by optimising engine
performance with partial loads.
Cycle Otto Otto
Cylinder number and position 8 - 90° V 8 - 90° V Injection
Version Quattroporte
Number of valves per cylinder 4 4
– Type Bosch Motronic ME7.1.1.
Bore and stroke mm 92x79.8 94x84.5
Version Quattroporte S
Total displacement cm3 4,244 4,691
– Type Bosch Motronic ME9.1.1.
Compression ratio 11.058±0.2:1 11.02
Ignition
Maximum power (EC) kW 295 317
– Static ignition
HP 400 430
– Ignition sequence: 1-8-6-2-7-3-4-5
corresponding RPM RPM 7,100 7,000
– Ignition coil: ELDOR
Maximum torque (EC) Nm 452 490
Version Quattroporte
kgm 46 50
– Spark plugs: NGK PMR8B.
corresponding RPM RPM 4,750 4,750
Version Quattroporte S 7
– Spark plugs: NGK PMR8C-H.

Battery
– FIAMM 12V 100 Ah 850A

Technical specifications 225

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 226 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Alternator Gearshifting
Version Quattroporte Six gears plus reverse.
– NIPPONDENSO 12V 150A Gear Gearbox ratios Total reduction ratios
Version Quattroporte S (engine RPM/wheel RPM)
– NIPPONDENSO SC2 12V 150A 1st gear 4.171 14.77
2nd gear 2.340 8.28
Lubrication system
3rd gear 1.521 5.38
The lubrication system is controlled by
the wet sump system through an oil 4th gear 1.143 4.05
pump and the relative suction screen, 5th gear 0.867 3.07
incorporated in the crankcase.
6th gear 0.691 2.45
Cooling system Reverse 3.403 12.05
Engine cooling is obtained by means of
an anti-freeze mixture circulating
inside a system with radiator,
centrifugal pump and expansion tank.

Transmission
Electro-hydraulically controlled
gearbox with 6 gears, torque
7 converter, lock-up clutch and anti-slip
function.
Modular TRANSAXLE transmission
shaft.
Traction system equipped with rear
self-locking differential.

226 Technical specifications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 227 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Differential Suspension Speed-sensitive steering wheel


The ratios are: Rack and pinion power steering, with
Front and rear
pump driven by the drive shaft and
Differential reduction ratio Articulated quadrilateral suspension.
tank. Articulated steering column,
13/46 = 3.54 Suspension with Skyhook with energy absorption and adjustable
adjustable damping (optional) inclination and height. Speed-
Brakes This system allows the driver to choose sensitive, it gets more rigid as the
two settings for the dampers in speed increases.
Service and emergency brakes relation to the conditions of the road – Steering diameter = 12.3 m
Self-ventilating disc brakes on the four surface, speed and comfort. – No. of steering wheel turns = 1.5
wheels.
(to the left and right)
Two diagonally opposed and
independent hydraulic control circuits.
Vacuum brake servo.
4-channel ABS system with Electronic
Brake force Distribution (EBD).

Electric parking brake


The electric parking brake (EPB) acts on
the rear wheels.
It is activated manually, by lifting the
lever found on the centre console
panel see page. 181.
7

Technical specifications 227

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap7_ing.fm Page 228 Thursday, December 11, 2008 6:21 PM

Wheels
Wheel rims and tyres
Version Quattroporte Version Quattroporte S
Wheel rim size Tyre size Wheel rim size Tyre size
8.5”J x 18” 245/45 ZR18 / /
front 8.5”J x 19” (+) 245/40 ZR19 8.5”J x 19” (+) 245/40 ZR19
8.5”J x 20” (+) 245/35 ZR20 8.5”J x 20” (+) 245/35 ZR20
10.5”J x 18” 285/40 ZR18 / /
rear 10.5”J x 19” (+) 285/35 ZR19 10.5”J x 19” (+) 285/35 ZR19
10.5”J x 20” (+) 295/30 ZR20 10.5”J x 20” (+) 295/30 ZR20
8.5”J x 18” 245/45 VR18 / /
*front
8.5”J x 19” 245/40 ZR19 / /
10.5”J x 18” 285/40 VR18 / /
*rear
10.5”J x 19” 285/40 VR19
* Winter tyres
+ Wheel rims available on request

228 Technical specifications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap7_ing.fm Page 229 Thursday, December 11, 2008 6:21 PM

Run Flat (optional)


Version Quattroporte Version Quattroporte S
Wheel rim size Tyre size Wheel rim size Tyre size
8.5”J x 18” 245/45 ZR18 / /
front
8.5”J x 19” 245/40 ZR19 8.5”J x 19” 245/40 ZR19
10.5”J x 18” 285/40 ZR18 / /
rear
10.5”J x 19” 285/35 ZR19 10.5”J x 19” 285/35 ZR19

Alternatively, winter tyres having the same dimensions as those provided with the vehicle can be used .

The maximum speed reachable with winter tyres is indicated by the tyre manufacturer. Always comply with the
regulations in force in the Country you are driving in.

WARNING: Notwithstanding the prescribed sizes, it is essential that tyres of the same brand and type are fitted to all the
wheels in order to ensure safe driving.
WARNING: Do not use air chambers on Tubeless tyres.

Spare wheel (emergency wheel - optional)


Alloy wheel rim.
Version Wheel rim size Tyre size Tyre brand
7
Quattroporte 6”J x 17” 185/60 R17 VREDESTEIN
Quattroporte S 6”J x 18” 175/55 R18 VREDESTEIN

Technical specifications 229

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap7_ing.fm Page 230 Wednesday, September 24, 2008 3:49 PM

Snow chains
Maximum radial protrusion permitted over the tyre profile: 9 mm.
Rear tyre Snow chains: brand/type
285/40 ZR18 Konig/SUPER MAGIC

WARNING: The snow chains must be fitted only on the rear tyres. For purchasing snow chains, please contact the Maserati
Service Network.

Performance
Version Quattroporte Version Quattroporte S
Maximum speed km/h mph km/h mph
270 168 280 174

The maximum speed reachable with winter tyres is indicated by the tyre manufacturer. Always comply with the
regulations in force in the Country you are driving in.

Accelerations in Version Quattroporte Version Quattroporte S


standing starts (in seconds) 0-100 Km/h 0-100 Km/h

7 5.6 5.4

Weights
Weights Version Quattroporte Version Quattroporte S
Unladen vehicle weight 1,990 kg 1,990 kg
(with tanks filled, tools and accessories)
Weight with full load 2,365 kg 2,365 kg
(5 persons plus luggage)

230 Technical specifications

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 231 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Dimensions

Luggage compartment volume (VDA standard): 450 dm3 approx.

891 mm 3064 mm 1142 mm

5097 mm
1438 mm

1582 mm 1595 mm

1895 mm

Technical specifications 231

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap7_ing.fm Page 232 Thursday, December 11, 2008 6:21 PM

Tyre pressure
Tyre inflation pressure when cold (bar).

Version Quattroporte Version Quattroporte S Inflation pressure


Wheel rim size Tyre size Wheel rim size Tyre size When cold (Bar)
8.5”J x 18” 245/45 ZR18 / / 2.2
front 8.5”J x 19” 245/40 ZR19 (+) 8.5”J x 19” 245/40 ZR19 (+) 2.2
8.5”J x 20” 245/35 ZR20 (+) 8.5”J x 20” 245/35 ZR20 (+) 2.2
10.5”J x 18” 285/40 ZR18 / / 2.2
rear 10.5”J x 19” 285/35 ZR19 (+) 10.5”J x 19” 285/35 ZR19 (+) 2.2
10.5”J x 20” 295/30 ZR20 (+) 10.5”J x 20” 295/30 ZR20 (+) 2.0
8.5”J x 18” 245/45 VR18 / / 2.2
* front
8.5”J x 19” 245/40 ZR19 / /
10.5”J x 18” 285/40 VR18 / / 2.2
* rear
10.5”J x 19” 285/40 VR19 / /
spare wheel
6”J x 17” 185/60 R17 2.2
(emergency wheel)

* Winter tyres
7 + Tyres available on request

Alternatively, winter tyres having the same dimensions as those provided with the vehicle can be used.

The maximum speed reachable with winter tyres is indicated by the tyre manufacturer. Always comply with the
regulations in force in the Country you are driving in.

232 Tyre pressure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap7_ing.fm Page 233 Thursday, December 11, 2008 6:21 PM

Run Flat (optional)

Version Quattroporte Version Quattroporte S Inflation pressure


Wheel rim size Tyre size Wheel rim size Tyre size When cold (Bar)
8.5”J x 18” 245/45 ZR18 / / 2.2
front
8.5”J x 19” 245/40 ZR19 8.5”J x 19” 245/40 ZR19 2.2
10.5”J x 18” 285/40 ZR18 / / 2.2
rear
10.5”J x 19” 285/35 ZR19 10.5”J x 19” 285/35 ZR19 2.2

Tyre pressure 233

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap8_FOTO_ing.fm Page 234 Friday, May 30, 2008 2:29 PM

234

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap8_FOTO_ing.fm Page 235 Friday, May 30, 2008 2:29 PM

Maintenance

Scheduled Maintenance Services 236


Additional operations 241
Level checks 242
Air filter 246
Dust/pollen filter 246
Battery 246
Electronic control units 248
Spark plugs 248
Wheels and tyres 249
Windscreen wipers 251
Air conditioning system 252
Bodywork 252
Interiors 254
If the vehicle is laid up for long periods 255
RF remote control: Ministerial homologation 256
8

235

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 236 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Scheduled Maintenance After the 9th maintenance The Scheduled Maintenance service is
service provided by the whole Maserati
Services Service Network. In the event that,
After the 9th service, maintenance
must be restarted with the operations when a service is performed, further
Correct maintenance is clearly the best scheduled for the 1st, 2nd and 3rd replacements or repairs are found to
way to guarantee vehicle performance service. be necessary in addition to the
and safety features, ensure respect for scheduled operations, these can be
the environment and low operating WARNING: The Scheduled carried out only with the specific
costs. Maintenance services are prescribed by consent of the Customer.
the Manufacturer. Failure to have the
WARNING: Also remember that the services carried out invalidates the WARNING: You are advised to notify
scrupulous observance of the warranty. the Maserati Service Network of any
maintenance procedures is essential minor operating problems, without
for the validity of the warranty. waiting for the next service.

For this reason, MASERATI has


provided for a series of checks and
maintenance operations involving the
1st service when the vehicle mileage
reaches 12,500 mi. (20,000 km) or after
2 years of the vehicle's life, and
subsequently every 12,500 mi. (20,000
km) or every 2 years.

236 Scheduled Maintenance Services

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 237 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

When the deadlines for Scheduled Select "MAINTENANCE INFO" on the WARNING: Every time the battery is
Maintenance are approaching, a Multi Media System to display the next disconnected, the Multi Media System
message on the display indicates that deadline for maintenance service (see date and time must be set following
maintenance service is due. The page 76 of the Multi Media System the instructions in the “Multi Media
deadline may be expressed in Km/Mi or manual). The number of kilometres/ System” manual, section 7,
days, whichever comes first. miles left before reaching the “Configuration”. Failure to perform
The message is displayed only once, maintenance service deadline is always this operation may cause the system to
upon activating the instrument panel, indicated. The days remaining before indicate wrong maintenance service
at decreasing intervals expressed in the scheduled date instead, are only intervals.
Km/Mi (1800, 1600, ...... 100, 50 ) or in indicated starting from the 511th day
days (27, 24, ....... 6, 3), accompanied by (approximately 17 months)..
a specific symbol (wrench):
When the number of kilometres/miles
or the expiry day for maintenance
service has been reached, every time
the instrument panel activates, the
message "Service coupon expired" will
be displayed.

Scheduled Maintenance Services 237

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 238 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Main operations to be carried out at the indicated mileage


Main operations Service 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th
Kilometres (x thousands) 20
Miles (x thousands) 12.5 or
2 years

Belt for alternator, air conditioning compressor and I I* I I* I I* I I* I


hydraulic steering control Replace at least every 2 years
Poly-V flexible control belt for water pump I I I I R I I I I
Replace every time the part is removed
Engine oil and filter R R R R R R R R R
Replace at least every 2 years
Cooling system connections and lines I I* I* I* I* I* I* I* I*
Air filter R R* R R* R R* R R* R
Fuel injection system’s connections and lines I I* I I* I
Ignition system: cables and connections I I* I I* I
Spark plugs R
Active carbon filter and Lambda sensors R
Replace at least every 4 years
Air injection system: connections and pipes valves I I I I I I I I I
Blow-by system I I I I
8 Fuel emission control system: lines, connections and valves I I I I
Gearbox oil I I I I I I I I I
Differential oil I I I I I I I I I

I = Inspect and carry out any other necessary operation A = Adjust R = Replace

238 Scheduled Maintenance Services

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 239 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Main operations Service 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th
Kilometres (x thousands) 20
Miles (x thousands) 12.5 or
2 years

Hydraulic steering fluid level (bleed if necessary) I I I I I I I I I


Replace every 2 years
Engine coolant level I I I I I I I I I
Replace every 2 years
Brake fluid level (bleed if necessary) I I I I I I I I I
Replace every 2 years
Brake system: lines, calipers, connections I I I I I I I I I
Efficiency of the dashboard warning lights
Handbrake operation
Wear condition of the braking parts (disks, pads); replace if I I I I I I I I I
necessary
Joints for front and rear suspensions, front and rear under- I I I I I I I I I
chassis – tightening torques
Steering system components, joint protection, rack boots I I I I I I I I I
on the steering levers and on the axle shafts
Tightening of screws, nuts and bolts (including those for I I I I I I I I I
the exhaust system), connections, retaining clips and
clamps
Pollen filter R R R R R R R R R 8
Replace every 2 years. In the event that the vehicle is frequently
used in dusty or strongly polluted environments, a more frequent
replacement is recommended

I = Inspect and carry out any other necessary operation A = Adjust R = Replace

Scheduled Maintenance Services 239

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 240 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Main operations Service 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th
Kilometres (x thousands) 20
Miles (x thousands) 12.5 or
2 years

Starter motor and alternator: power absorption and I I I I


charge
Vehicle geometry check I I I I I I I I I
Controls and adjustment systems in general, hinges, doors, I I I I I I I I I
front and rear lid
Correct operation and reliability of the seats and seat belts I I I I I I I I I
Fastening screws and nuts on the bodywork I I I I I
Headlight aiming I I I I I I I I I
Chassis and protected area intactness I I I I I I I I I
Check every 2 years
Leather interiors treatment I I I I I I I I I
Vehicle road test (any time this may be necessary) I I I I I I I I I
Check with SD3 diagnostics system I I I I I I I I I

I = Inspect and carry out any other necessary operation A = Adjust R = Replace

All the operations marked with and The warranty concerning emissions
asterisk (*) are not compulsory but and the Manufacturer's responsibility
8 rather recommended, in the event that to recall the vehicle in case of problems
the vehicle is frequently used in heavy- shall not be invalidated if the
traffic conditions or on dusty or sandy Customer does not carry out the
roads. operations marked with the asterisk
(*).

240 Scheduled Maintenance Services

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 241 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Additional operations WARNING - Engine oil WARNING - Air filter


If the vehicle is used mainly in one of When using the vehicle on dusty roads,
Every 500 km (310 mi) or before long the following particularly severe replace the air filter more frequently
journeys, check and if necessary conditions: than indicated on the Service Time
correct: – dusty roads Schedule.
– engine coolant level Contact the Maserati Service Network
– short repetitive trips (less than 7-8
if you have any doubts about the
– windscreen washer fluid level km / 4-5 mi) when the external
frequency for the engine oil and air
– tyre pressure and condition. temperature is below zero.
filter replacements, in the relation to
– engine running frequently at idle the vehicle's conditions of use.
speed or without reaching steady
operating temperatures, replace the WARNING: All maintenance
engine oil more frequently than operations for the vehicle must be
indicated on the Service Time carried out by the Maserati Service
Schedule. Network. For those routine and minor
maintenance operations which you
can carry out yourself, make sure that
you always use suitable equipment,
original Maserati spare parts and the
prescribed fluids; in any case, never
carry out these operations if you have
no experience.

Additional operations 241

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 242 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Level checks
1) Engine oil
2) Engine coolant
3) Windscreen washer fluid
4) Brake fluid
5) Power steering fluid

2
3

242 Level checks

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 243 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Engine oil If the oil level is close to or below the WARNING: The engine oil used and the
MIN level notch, top up to the MAX oil filter replaced contain substances
The level must be checked with the
notch through the filler neck that are dangerous for the
vehicle on a flat surface, following the
positioned next to the dipstick and environment. For replacing the oil and
procedure below:
closed with the cap A. The oil level the filters you are advised to contact
– Warm-up the vehicle until reaching should never exceed the MAX the Maserati Service Network, where
the standard operating temperature reference mark. all the necessary equipment is
– Stop the engine, remove the filler available to dispose of the used oil and
cap A and wait 5 minutes to allow WARNING: Do not top up with oil filters in compliance with the
the oil to flow into the sump having characteristics other than those regulations in force and in an
– Measure the level and top up if of the oil already used in the engine. environment-friendly manner.
necessary. After topping up, the engine oil level
The oil level must be between the MIN warning light may not go off for some
and MAX reference on the dipstick. time while the system is performing
The gap between MIN and MAX the necessary tests. This is to be
corresponds to about 1.5 litres considered normal.
(0.33 UK gal) of oil.
After having topped up or replaced
WARNING: Do not exceed the MAX the oil, check its level once again.
level!

A
8
MAX

MIN

Level checks 243

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 244 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Gearbox oil Engine coolant Windscreen/headlight washer


Contact the Maserati Service Network fluid
When the engine is very hot,
for the oil level check. To top up with fluid, open the cover D,
do not remove the cap from
pull out the filler neck extension and
the pan: risk of burns!
WARNING: Do not top up with oil pour in a mixture of water and
having characteristics other than those detergent fluid, in the proportions
The fluid level must be checked when
of the oil already used in the engine. indicated on the product's packaging.
the engine is cold, and it must fall
between the MIN and MAX references
WARNING: Waste gearbox oil contains WARNING: If the temperature is below
marked on the pan.
substances that are dangerous for the –20 °C (-4 °F), use pure detergent fluid.
If the level is low, slowly pour the
environment. For replacing the oil, you
prescribed fluid through the filler neck
are advised to contact the Maserati WARNING: Do not drive with the
Service Network, where the necessary on the pan until the level is close to the windscreen washer reservoir empty:
equipment is available to dispose of MAX reference point. the action of the washer is essential for
the used oil in compliance with the improving visibility.
regulations in force and in an
environment-friendly manner.

D
8
MAX

MIN

244 Level checks

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 245 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Power steering fluid Brake fluid WARNING: Do not let the brake fluid,
which is highly corrosive, come into
Check that the fluid level in the tank is
WARNING: Make sure that the power contact with the paintwork. If this
at the maximum level. If the level
steering fluid does not come in touch should happen, wash the paintwork
drops below the minimum level, with
with the engine hot parts as it is immediately with water.
the ignition key turned to MAR, the
flammable.
warning light turns on on the
WARNING: The symbol on the
instrument panel.
With the vehicle on a level ground and container identifies the synthetic type
the engine cold, check that the fluid of brake fluid, distinguishing it from
If fluid is needed, use only the type
level corresponds with the MAX notch the mineral type. Using mineral fluids
classified as DOT4.
on the tank cap dipstick. damages the special rubber linings of
To carry out the check, unscrew the the brake system beyond repair.
WARNING: The brake fluid is
cap, clean the dipstick, tighten the cap
hygroscopic (i.e. it absorbs humidity).
back on tight, remove it again and
For this reason, if the vehicle is used
check the level.
mainly in areas with a high rate of
When the oil is hot, the level may even
atmospheric humidity, the fluid should
exceed the MAX notch.
be changed more frequently than
If necessary, top up with fluid making
indicated in the Service Time Schedule.
sure that it has the same characteristics
as the one already used in the system.

MAX
8

MAX
MAX

MAX
MIN

Level checks 245

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 246 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Air filter Dust/pollen filter Battery


Contact the Maserati Service Network This filter performs mechanic/ The battery fitted is of the “low
to have the air filter replaced. electrostatic air filtering, provided that maintenance” type, and is located on
windows and doors are perfectly the right-hand side of the luggage
closed. compartment.
Have your dust/pollen filter replaced at To access the battery, remove the cover
least once a year at a Maserati Service A by lifting the fastening hooks B.
Network Centre, preferably at the The battery fluid (electrolyte), with the
beginning of the summer period. vehicle on the level, must always fall
IF the car is mainly used in the city between the reference marks MIN and
traffic, on highways or dusty roads, we MAX on the battery.
recommend to replace the filter more In the event that the level is below the
frequently than prescribed in the MIN reference mark, please contact
Service Time Schedule. the Maserati Service Network to have
the system checked.
WARNING: Failure to replace the filter To recharge the battery, see the section
may considerably reduce the air “In an emergency”.
conditioning and heating system
efficiency.

We recommend that you


replace the dust/pollen filter
at a Maserati Service Network
Centre. B A

246 Air
Airfilter
filter/ Dust/pollen filter / Battery

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 247 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

The fluid contained in the Useful advices for extending the We recommend you to have the
battery is poisonous and life of the battery battery charge condition checked,
corrosive. Avoid contact with When parking the vehicle, make sure preferably at the beginning of the cold
the skin and eyes. Do not approach the that the doors, front, rear lids and flaps season, to prevent the electrolyte from
battery with naked flames or possible freezing.
are properly closed. All interior lights
sources of sparks: risk of explosion This check should be carried out more
should be off.
and fire. frequently if the vehicle is used mainly
When the engine is turned off, do not
keep the connected devices switched for short trips or if it is equipped with
Batteries contain substances that are power absorbing devices that remain
on for a long time (for example the
very harmful for the environment. To permanently on even if when the
radio, the hazard warning lights, the
replace the battery, please contact the ignition key is removed. This applies
fan, etc.).
Maserati Service Network, where the above all if these devices have been
battery will be disposed of in full retrofitted ("After market" services).
WARNING: If the battery charge
compliance with the regulations in If the vehicle is not used for long
remains below 50% for a long period
force and in an environment-friendly periods of time, please refer to the
of time, it will be damaged due to
manner. section “If the vehicle is laid up for
sulphating; its performance and
starting power will be reduced and it long periods”, in this section.
WARNING: Incorrect assembly of
will be more subject to freezing (this
electrical and electronic accessories can can happen even at -10°C / 14 °F). WARNING: If additional systems have
cause serious damage to the vehicle. to be fitted in the vehicle, there is the
risk of creating dangerous branches on
the electric wiring, in particular if the
safety devices are involved.

Battery 247

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 248 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Electronic control units – Do not connect or disconnect the Spark plugs


terminals of the electronic control
units when the ignition key is in the
No special precautions are required for It is essential that the spark plugs are
MAR position.
the normal use of the vehicle. sound and clean for the engine to
In case of repairs to the electrical – Do not check the electric polarities work efficiently and to ensure that
system or in an emergency starting, the through sparking. polluting emissions are kept to a
following instructions must be strictly – Disconnect the electronic control minimum level.
followed: units when carrying out electric
– Never disconnect the battery from weldings on the body. Remove them WARNING: The spark plugs must be
the electrical system when the if the temperature is over 80 °C changed at the intervals specified in
engine is running. (176 °F) (special interventions on the the Service Time Schedule. Only use
bodywork, etc.). the prescribed spark plugs: faults may
– Disconnect the battery from the
arise if the heat rating is unsuitable, or
electrical system when recharging it. WARNING: Incorrect installation or if the specified working life is not
modifications to the radio and alarm guaranteed.
WARNING: When the battery is
systems may interfere with the proper
disconnected, you must first detach
operation of the electronic control
the negative pole terminal (–) and then
units.
the positive pole one (+).
When the battery is reconnected, you
WARNING: Changes or repairs to the
must first attach the positive pole (+)
electrical system carried out in an
and then the negative one (–).
incorrect manner or without taking
into account the technical
– Never carry out an emergency start specifications of the system may cause
with a battery charger: always use an operating anomalies with the risk of
auxiliary battery. fire.
8 – Take special care when connecting
the battery to the electrical system, WARNING: If you need to wash the
checking both for correct polarity engine compartment, do not direct the
and for the connection efficiency. jet of water for too long directly on the
engine compartment ECU.

248 Electroniccontrol
Electronic controlunits
units/ Spark plugs

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 249 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Wheels and tyres How to use the tyres Impacts with kerbs, holes, and
obstacles in the road, and prolonged
WARNING: The tyres must be
trips on rough roads can cause tyre
To obtain the best constantly kept in good conditions to
damage which may not be visible to
performances and the longest ensure safe driving.
the naked eye.
mileage from the tyres,
Check your tyres regularly for any signs
comply with the following The tyres' inflation pressure must
of damage (e.g. scratches, cuts, cracks,
precautions during the first 310 miles correspond to the prescribed values
bulges, etc.).
(500 km): and should be checked only when the
If sharp objects penetrate the tyres,
- do not drive at maximum allowed tyres have cooled down. In fact, the
they can cause structural damage
speed pressure increases as the tyre
which is only visible when the tyre is
- drive on curves at low speed temperature progressively increases.
removed.
- avoid sudden steering Never reduce the pressure if tyres are
In any case, any possible damage must
- avoid sudden braking hot.
be inspected by an experienced tyre
- avoid sudden accelerations Insufficient tyre inflating pressure can
fitter, as it may seriously reduce the
- do not drive at high speeds for too cause tyre overheating and possible
tyre life.
long. internal damages, which may even
Remember that tyres deteriorate with
lead to the tyre destruction.
time, even if used little or not at all.
Cracks in the tyre tread and sides,
Check the inflating pressure of
alongside possible bulging, are a sign
the tyres when cold, at least
every two weeks and before of deterioration.
long trips.

Wheels and tyres 249

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 250 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Have the old tyres inspected During the tyre life, the rolling
by an experienced tyre fitter, direction used for the first
to make sure they can still be fitting shall always be
used safely. If the same tyre has been observed, also in case of “non-
on your vehicle for 4 or 5 years, have it directional” tyres.
inspected anyway by an experienced
tyre fitter. Check the depth of the tyre
tread at regular intervals
Never fit tyres of uncertain (minimum allowed value 1.6
origin. mm). The thinner is the tread, the
greater is the risk of skidding.
“Directional” tyres have an
Drive carefully on wet roads
arrow on their side showing
to decrease the risk of
the rolling direction. To keep
aquaplaning.
the best performance when replacing
a tyre, make sure that the rolling
direction corresponds to the one
shown by the arrow.

250 Wheels and tyres

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 251 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Windscreen wipers We recommend therefore that Spray nozzles


you have any interventions
If the jet does not work, first check that
involving the removal of the
Clean the rubber parts regularly using there is fluid in the pan (see “Level
windscreen wiper arms carried out at a
the specific products. checks” in this section) then check that
Maserati Service Network Centre.
Replace the blades if the edge of the the nozzles are not clogged.
rubber is deformed or worn. In any Some simple measures may reduce the
case, the blades should be replaced Replacing the windscreen wiper
possibility of damage to the blades.
approximately once a year. blades
– In the case of temperatures below
Due to the difficulty of this operation,
Travelling with worn wiper zero (32 °F), check that ice has not
we recommend that you contact the
blades is very dangerous stuck the rubber part against the
Maserati Service Network for
because it reduces the windscreen glass. If necessary, use an
replacement.
visibility in the event of poor anti-freeze product to detach it.
atmospheric conditions. – Remove any snow that has
accumulated on the windscreen: as
The arms of the wiper blade well as protecting the blades, this
have to be replaced with new avoids forcing and overheating the
ones after two disassembling wiper’s electric motor.
operations. The special arm fixing – Do not operate the wipers when the
system guarantees the perfect windscreen is dry.
mechanical stability only for the first
two refitting operations, provided
that the specified tightening torque is
observed.

Windscreen wipers 251

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 252 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Air conditioning system Bodywork – Spraying of the underbody, engine


compartment, insides of wheel
housings, and other structures with
During the winter, the air conditioning Protection from atmospheric wax products having high protective
system should be operated at least agents power.
once a month for about 10 minutes. The main causes of corrosion are:
Before the summer season, have the – Spraying of plastic materials, with a
– atmospheric pollution protective function, in the most
system efficiency checked by the
Maserati Service Network. – salinity and humidity in the exposed points: underneath the
atmosphere (marine areas or a damp doors, inside part of the mud guards,
WARNING: The system uses R134a type climate) edges, etc.
coolant that, in the event of accidental – seasonal environmental conditions. – Use of ventilated box sections,
leakage, is not harmful for the – salt scattered on the roadbed to melt coated with protective wax
environment. Under no circumstances ice and snow. products, to avoid condensation and
should you use R12 fluid that, in trapped water which could
The abrasive action of wind-carried
addition to being incompatible with encourage the formation of internal
the system components, contains atmospheric dust and sand, mud and
rust.
chloro-fluoro-carbons (CFCs). stones should not be underestimated.
On your vehicle, MASERATI has Advices for keeping the
adopted the best technological bodywork in good condition
solutions to protect the bodywork
Paint
from corrosion.
The paintwork does not only have an
The main measures are:
aesthetic function but also serves to
– Paint products and systems that give protect the metal sheets. In the event
the vehicle particular resistance to of abrasions or deep scratches, we
corrosion and abrasion. recommend to have the necessary
– Use of galvanised (or pre-treated)
8 metal sheets which are highly
touch-ups made immediately, to avoid
any rust formation.
resistant to corrosion in the most Touch-ups do not feature particular
exposed parts. difficulties, even on metallic finishes.
For all paint touch-ups, use only
original products indicated on the
plate applied on the engine
compartment lid.
252 Airconditioning
Air conditioningsystem
system/ Bodywork

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 253 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Normal paint maintenance consists in in which water can be trapped more Windows
washing, the frequency of which easily. To clean the windows use special
depends on the conditions of use and You are recommended not to take the detergents.
of the environment. For example, in vehicle immediately into an enclosed Only use clean cloths so as not to
areas where there is high atmospheric environment, but leave it in the open scratch the windows or rendering
pollution or the roads are spread with air so as to allow the water to them less transparent.
anti-freeze salt, it is advisable to wash evaporate.
the vehicle more frequently. Do not wash the vehicle after it has WARNING: In order not to damage the
been left in the sun or when the electric elements fitted inside the
WARNING: Detergents pollute water. engine lid is hot: the paint gloss could heated rear window, rub gently
Therefore the vehicle should be be affected. following the direction of the
washed in areas equipped for the External plastic parts must be cleaned elements.
collection and purification of the fluids with the same procedure followed for
used for washing. the normal washing of the vehicle. Engine compartment
Avoid, as far as possible, parking the At the end of each winter season,
WARNING: If you are washing the vehicle under trees; the resinous carefully wash the engine
vehicle with roller brushes, you must substances that very often drop from compartment, remembering to avoid
protect the edges of the rear, lateral the trees give the paint a dull directing the jet of water for too long
brand symbol with tape, to prevent it appearance and increase the on the ECUs on the left-hand side, next
from being detached by the revolving possibility of originating corrosive to the brake fluid tank, and on the
brushes. processes. relay and fuse boxes on the right-hand
side of the engine compartment
For correct washing: WARNING: Bird droppings must be (driving direction). To perform this
– Wet the bodywork with a low- washed off immediately and operation, you must contact a
pressure water jet. thoroughly, since their acidity is
specialised workshop.
– Pass a sponge with a light detergent particularly corrosive.
solution over the bodywork, WARNING: Wash only when the
8
frequently rinsing the sponge. WARNING: To provide better
engine is cold and with the ignition
protection for the paint, polish the
– Rinse well with water and dry with key turned to STOP. After washing,
vehicle at intervals with a suitable
an air jet or chamois leather. make sure that the various protections
product leaving a protective film on
(e.g. rubber boots/caps, guards etc.)
When drying, take particular care with the paint.
have not been removed or damaged.
the parts that are less visible, such as
the door and lid bays, headlight edges,
Bodywork 253

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 254 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Interiors WARNING: Never use alcohol, alcohol- Parts in premium quality wood
based products or solvents.
Remove any dirt with a buckskin
Check at regular intervals that there is leather or damp cloth.
Leather upholstery treatment
no water trapped under the mats (due
to drips off shoes, umbrellas etc.) Have the leather upholstery only WARNING: Do not use alcohol, petrol
which may cause the metal parts to treated, as provided in the Service or solvents to clean the instrument
oxidize. Time Schedule, by the Maserati Service panel's transparent dome.
Network which has the required
Cleaning the leather upholstery specific products. Do not keep aerosol cans in
the vehicle. Risk of explosion.
– Remove the dry dirt with a damp
Aerosol cans should never be
buckskin leather or cloth, without
exposed to a temperature above 50 °C
rubbing too hard.
(122 °F). The temperature inside the
– Remove liquid or grease stains with a vehicle when exposed to the sun may
dry absorbent cloth, without easily exceed this threshold.
rubbing.
– Then run a soft cloth or buckskin
damped with water and neutral
detergent.
– If the stain persists, use special
products paying attention to the
instructions for use.

254 Interiors

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 255 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

If the vehicle is laid up for not allow the humidity on the – Have the engine oil and filter
vehicle surface to evaporate. replaced.
long periods – Inflate the tyres up to a pressure – Check the fluid levels in the brake
which must be 1 bar higher than the system, as well as the engine coolant
If the vehicle is going to be laid up for normally prescribed one, and check level.
several months, follow the below it at regular intervals. – Check the air filter and have them
precautions:
replaced if necessary.
– Wash and dry the vehicle thoroughly. The tyre pressure must be
– Check the conditions of the engine
– Store the vehicle in a covered, dry brought back to the
belts.
and, if possible, ventilated area. prescribed value before
reusing the vehicle. – Reconnect the battery after having
– Select P (PARK), then turn the key to checked its charge condition and
position STOP. carry out the initialisation
– Do not empty the engine cooling
– Disconnect the battery. system. procedures where required. You can
– Check the battery charge condition. consult the chapter “Reconnecting
This check should be carried out Restarting the vehicle the battery” in this section for
monthly while the vehicle is idle. further information on this subject.
Before restarting the vehicle after a
Recharge the battery if the load-free long period of inactivity, we – With the gearshift in neutral (N), let
voltage is below 12.5 V. recommend that you carry out the the engine idle for several minutes.
– Check that the handbrake is not following operations:
engaged. This procedure must be
Check the tyres for pressure performed outdoors. Exhaust
– Clean and protect the painted parts
and for any damages, cuts or gases contain carbon
applying protective wax.
cracks. If this is the case, have monoxide which is strongly toxic and
– Clean and protect polished metal potentially lethal.
them replaced.
parts with special products available
on the market.
– Do not dry-rub the external surface
8
– Talc the windscreen wiper blades and of the vehicle.
raise them from the windscreen.
– Visually inspect if there are any fluid
– Cover the vehicle with a long cloth in leaks (oil, brake and clutch fluid,
transpirating fabric (available from engine coolant etc.).
the Maserati Service Network). Do
not use thick plastic sheets, which do

If the vehicle is laid up for long periods 255

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 256 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Battery reconnection WARNING: Every time the battery is RF remote control:


reconnected the warning lights
– Open the luggage compartment lid Ministerial homologation
and flash for about 10 seconds
with the key;
and then go off.
– connect the battery; Some countries do not require a
– unlock and lock the doors using the specific domestic homologation in the
remote control; event that the vehicle has already
– -turn on the Multi Media System and obtained other European
set the date and time following the homologations.
instructions given in the section
"Configuration" in the "Multi Media
System" manual.

WARNING: Every time the battery is


reconnected, wait at least 30 seconds
with the ignition key turned to MAR
before starting the engine, in order to
allow the electronic system that
manages the motor-driven throttles to
run a self-learning cycle. At the same
time, you can run the set-up procedure
for the “Multi Media System”.

256 RF remote control: Ministerial homologation

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 257 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Conversion table
Distance
1 km = 0.6214 mi 1 mi = 1.609 km
1m = 3.2808 ft 1 ft = 0.3048 m
1m = 1.0936 yd 1 yd = 0.9144 m
1 cm = 0.3937 in 1 in = 2.54 cm
Volume
1l = 0.2642 US gallon 1 US gallon = 3.785 l
Weight
1 kg = 2.2046 lb 1 lb = 0.4536 kg
Power
1 kW = 1.341 hp 1 hp = 0.746 kW
Pressure
1 bar = 14.5 psi 1 psi = 0.0689 bar
Consumptions
1 km/l = 0.4251 mpg 1 mpg = 2.3524 km/l

RF remote control: Ministerial homologation 257

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap9_FOTO_ing.fm Page 258 Friday, May 30, 2008 2:32 PM

258

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap9_FOTO_ing.fm Page 259 Friday, May 30, 2008 2:32 PM

Table of contents

Table of contents 260


Alphabetical table of contents 265

259

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 260 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Table of contents Adjusting the front seat belts MSR function (engine braking
height (front seats only) 23 torque adjustment) 44
Using the rear seat belts 23 ABS and EBD systems 45
Historical info 4 Load limiting devices 24 Tyre pressure monitoring system
Introduction 7 Pretensioners 24 (optional) 47
Consulting the Manual 7 General warnings for using System calibration 47
Abbreviations 7 the seat belts 25 Viewing messages on the display 48
Updating 7 How to keep seat belts efficient 26 Normal conditions 49
Service 8 Safe transport of children 27 Low pressure 49
Automatic gearbox 8 Groups 0 and 0+ 30 Tyre punctures 50
Multi Media System 8 Group 1 30 “Run Flat” tyre puncture 50
“Run Flat” tyres Group 2 31 System not calibrated 52
(optional) 9 Group 3 31 Tyre pressure monitoring
Towing the vehicle 9 Suitability of the passenger seats system failure 52
Symbols 10 for using child seats 32 System temporarily not active 53
Danger symbols 10 Isofix seats 33 System not active 53
Symbols of prohibitions 10 Fitting child vehicle seats for Parking sensors 54
Warning symbols 11 groups 0 and 0+ 35 Stop & Go function 55
Symbols indicating compulsory Fitting child seats type 1 35 Cleaning the sensors 55
measures 11 Front and side airbags 36 Sensor range 56
Contents 13 Front airbags 37 Failure indicators 57
Passenger’s airbag Fuel cut-out inertia switch 58
Vehicle identification data 15 (full size airbag) 38 Resetting the switch 58
Identification plates 16 Passenger’s Airbag manual
Chassis marking 16 deactivation switch Instruments and controls 61
Engine marking 16 (where available) 39 Dashboard 62
Paint identification plate 16 Front and rear lateral airbags 40 Instrument panel 68
Vehicle identification plate 17 General warnings 41 Indicators and warning lights 69
Key codes 18 MSP System 43
Instruments and gauges 75
Activation 43
9 Active and passive safety 21 Fault indicators 43
Fuel level gauge (1)
Tachometer (2)
75
75
Seat belts 22 ASR system (electronic anti-skid Rev. Counter (4) 75
Fastening the seat belts 22 device) 44 Coolant temperature gauge (5) 76
Activation 44 Display (3) 76
Fault indicators 44
260 Table of contents

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 261 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Controls 77 Before you drive 99 Deactivation 114


TRIP screen page 78 Doors 100 Getting into the vehicle when the
Tyre pressure screen page 78 Opening doors from the outside 100 alarm system is on 114
RPM indicator screen page 80 Opening from the inside 101 Deactivating the motion sensing
Multi Media System Doors open warning lights 101 alarm 115
configuration menu 80 Rear door internal locking device Deactivating the anti-lift alarm 115
Controls 81 (child safety device) 101 Alarm memory 115
Controls to the left Automatic door locking over Ministerial homologation 115
of the steering wheel 81 20 km/H 102 Ordering extra radio operated
Controls to the right Door release in the event of an controls 115
of the steering wheel 83 accident 102 Replacing radio operated
Side buttons on the Multi Door lock ECU initialisation 103 control batteries 116
Media System display 84 Door open indicator 103 Front seats 117
Roof controls 86 Underdoor courtesy light 103 Back/forwards adjustment 117
Internal outfits 87 Power windows 104 Height adjustment 117
Sunroof (optional) 87 Finger-trap prevention device 104 Seat inclination adjustment
Front dome light 88 Operation in manual (tilting) 117
Rear dome light 88 and automatic modes 104 Seatback rake adjustment 117
Sun visors 89 Controls 105 Adjusting the headrest 117
Clock 89 Centralised windows Lumbar support adjustment 117
Rear window sunshade 89 and sunroof closing/opening 105 Comfort Pack (optional) 118
Rear door sunshades (optional) 90 Engine compartment lid 106 Winter Pack (optional) 118
Front ashtray and cigarette Luggage compartment 107 Storing the seats' and external
lighter 90 rear-view mirrors' positions 119
Fuel tank flap 108
Rear ashtray 91 Headrest 119
Fuel tank flap emergency Armrest 120
Beverage holder on centre
opening 108 Easy entry/exit system 120
console 91
Keys 109 Rear seats 121
Glove compartment 91
Glove box 92 The Maserati CODE system 109 Rear seat adjustments (optional) 121
Beverage cooler 92 Operation 109 Armrest 121
Map pockets 92 Duplicating the keys
Emergency starting
110
110
Comfort Pack (optional) 122 9
Handholds 93 Comfort Pack Controls 123
Tables (optional) 93 Ignition switch 112 Winter Pack (optional) 123
HomeLink (optional) 94 Electronic alarm system 113 Headrests 123
Activation 113 Rear-view mirrors 124
Table of contents 261

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 262 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

External rear-view mirrors 124 Air conditioning and heating Constant speed regulator (Cruise
Electrochromic external rear-view system 141 Control) 168
mirrors (optional) 125 Front automatic heating/air General 168
Electrochromic internal rear-view conditioning controls (A) 143 Controls 168
mirror 125 Rear automatic heating/air Storing a speed 169
Steering wheel 126 conditioning controls (B) Restoring the speed stored
Easy entry/exit system 126 (optional) 144 in the memory 169
External lights and direction General 145 Increasing the speed stored
indicators 127 Rear control panel 147 in the memory 169
Light switch 127 System initialisation 147 Reducing the speed stored
Parking lights 127 Bose® Surround Sound 148 in the memory 170
Automatic on and off 128 Resetting the speed stored
Twilight sensor 128 Using the vehicle 151 in the memory 170
Direction indicators 129 Starting the engine 152 Electronic suspensions (Skyhook)
High beams 129 Starting-off when the engine (optional) 171
Flashing the headlights 129 is cool 152 Self-diagnosis 171
“Follow me home” function 130 Emergency starting with Settings 172
Windscreen wiper/washer and auxiliary battery 153 Fault signals 173
headlight washers 131 Turning off the engine 153 Headlights 174
Windscreen wipers 131 Electronic automatic gearbox 154 Xenon headlights 174
Windscreen washer 131 Automatic operation (AUTO) 156 Driving conditions 175
Headlight washers 131 + / - – Sequential manual Before your trip 175
Rain sensor 132 operation (MANUAL) 158 Capacities 175
Sensor failure 132 Other system functions 159 Safe driving 175
Maserati Multi Media System 133 Malfunction indication 162 Before you drive 175
Push start 163 Travelling 176
Controls 134
Towing the vehicle 163 Driving at night 177
Radio 138
Gearshift levers on the steering Driving in the rain 177
CD, MP3 and Jukebox 138
wheel (optional) 164 Driving in fog 177
AUX module 139
USB Socket 139 Using the brakes 165 Driving in the mountains 178
9 On-board TRIP computer 139 Use of the engine 166 Driving on snow or ice 178
Bluetooth® function 139 Breaking-in 166 Air quality control devices 179
Navigator 140 Engine and transmission 166 Other advices 180
® Infotainment (optional) While driving 166
Bose 140 Parking 181
Engine control system (EOBD) 167
262 Table of contents

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 263 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Electric parking brake 181 Maxi Fuse colours 203 Capacities and technical
Tyres 184 Fuses and relays in the engine specifications 219
Tyre inflation pressure compartment 204 Fuel 220
when cold 184 Engine compartment relay 205 Engine oil 220
Winter tyres 184 Engine compartment fuses 205
Capacities: quantity and specifications
Snow chains 185 Fuses and relays in the passenger
of the products to use 221
Useful accessories to keep compartment, to the left of the
Capacities and recommended
on-board 185 steering wheel 208
products 221
Relays in the passenger
In an emergency 187 compartment, to the left of the Fuel consumption 223
steering wheel 209 Fuel consumption following the
Emergency start 188
Fuses inside the passenger 2004/3/EC directive
Toolkit 189
compartment, to the left of the (litres per 100 km) 223
If a tyre gets a puncture 190 CO2 exhaust emissions 224
steering wheel 209
Precautions in the event of a CO2 emissions according to (*)
Relay/fuse boxes inside
puncture 190 Directive 2004/3/EC (g/km) 224
the luggage compartment 211
Spare wheel (emergency
Relays inside the luggage Technical specifications 225
wheel - optional) 192
compartment 212 Engine 225
Refitting the standard wheel 196
Fuses inside the luggage Injection – Ignition 225
If an exterior light goes out 197
compartment 212 Battery 225
Headlight clusters 197 Alternator 226
If the battery is flat 214
Taillight clusters 197 Lubrication system 226
Starting with the auxiliary
Direction indicator side lights 198 Cooling system 226
battery 214
Third stop light 199 Transmission 226
Recharging the battery 214
Number plate lights 199 Brakes 227
If you have to jack up the vehicle 215
If an interior light goes out 200 Suspension 227
Using the jack 215
Front and rear dome light 200 Speed-sensitive steering wheel 227
Courtesy mirror light 200 If you have to tow the vehicle 216
Wheels 228
Glove compartment, glove box In the event of an accident 217
Performance 230
and luggage compartment light 201 If there are injured persons 217 Weights 230
Courtesy lights (below door) 202 First aid kit 217
If a fuse blows 203
Dimensions 231 9
Tyre pressure 232
Replacing the fuses 203
Position of fuses/relays 203
Fuse colours 203

Table of contents 263

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 264 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Maintenance 235 Protection from atmospheric


Scheduled Maintenance Services 236 agents 252
After the 9th maintenance Advices for keeping
service 236 the bodywork in good condition 252
Main operations to be carried Engine compartment 253
out at the indicated mileage 238 Interiors 254
Additional operations 241 Cleaning the leather upholstery 254
WARNING - Engine oil 241 Leather upholstery treatment 254
WARNING - Air filter 241 Parts in premium quality wood 254
Level checks 242 If the vehicle is laid up
Engine oil 243 for long periods 255
Gearbox oil 244 Restarting the vehicle 255
Engine coolant 244 Battery reconnection 256
Windscreen/headlight washer RF remote control: Ministerial
fluid 244 homologation 256
Power steering fluid 245 Conversion table 257
Brake fluid 245
Air filter 246 Table of contents 259
Dust/pollen filter 246 Table of contents 260
Battery 246 Alphabetical table of contents 265
Useful advices for extending Details to be recorded 271
the life of the battery 247
Electronic control units 248
Spark plugs 248
Wheels and tyres 249
How to use the tyres 249
Windscreen wipers 251
Spray nozzles 251
Replacing the windscreen wiper
9 blades 251
Air conditioning system 252
Bodywork 252

264 Table of contents

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 265 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Alphabetical table of ASR system failure 73 Capacities: quantity and


Automatic door locking over specifications of the products
contents 20 km/H 102 to use 221
Automatic Gearbox failure (*) 69 Catalyst temperature too high 72
Automatic gearbox setting 74 CD, MP3 and Jukebox 138
A Automatic gearbox 8 Centralised windows
Abbreviations 7 Automatic on and off 128 and sunroof closing/opening 105
ABS and EBD systems 45 Automatic operation (AUTO) 156 Chassis marking 16
Activation 113 AUX module 139 Cleaning the leather upholstery 254
Activation 43 Cleaning the sensors 55
Activation 44 B Clock 89
Adaptive Light Control CO2 emissions according to (*)
system failure 73 Back/forwards adjustment 117 Directive 2004/3/EC (g/km) 224
Additional operations 241 Battery reconnection 256 CO2 exhaust emissions 224
Adjusting the front seat belts Battery 225 Comfort Pack (optional) 118
height (front seats only) 23 Battery 246 Comfort Pack (optional) 122
Adjusting the headrest 117 Before you drive 175 Comfort Pack Controls 123
Advices for keeping the bodywork Before your trip 175 Constant speed regulator
in good condition 252 Beverage cooler 92 (Cruise Control) 168
After the 9th maintenance service 236 Beverage holder on centre Consulting the Manual 7
Air conditioning and heating console 91 Controls 81
system 141 Bluetooth® function 139 Controls to the left
Air conditioning system 252 Bodywork 252 of the steering wheel 81
Air filter 246 Bose® Infotainment (optional) 140 Controls to the right
Air quality control devices 179 Bose® Surround Sound 148 of the steering wheel 83
Airbag/pre-tensioner failure (*) 70 Brake fluid 245 Controls 105
Alarm memory 115 Brake pads worn (*) 71 Controls 134
Alphabetical table of contents 265 Brakes 227 Controls 168
Alternator failure (*) 69 Breaking-in 166 Controls 77
Alternator 226 Conversion table 257
Armrest 120 C Coolant temperature gauge (5) 76 9
Armrest 121 Cooling system 226
ASR system (electronic anti-skid Capacities and recommended Courtesy lights (below door) 202
device) 44 products 221 Courtesy mirror light 200
Capacities 175 Cruise Control 72
Table of contents 265

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 266 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

D Electrochromic external rear-view F


mirrors (optional) 125
Danger symbols 10 Electrochromic internal rear-view Failure indicators 57
Dashboard 62 mirror 125 Fastening the seat belts 22
Deactivating the anti-lift alarm 115 Electronic alarm system 113 Fault indicators 43
Deactivating the motion sensing Electronic automatic gearbox 154 Fault indicators 44
alarm 115 Electronic control units 248 Fault signals 173
Deactivation 114 Electronic suspensions (Skyhook) Finger-trap prevention device 104
Defective ABS system (*) 70 (optional) 171 Finger-trap prevention system
Details to be recorded 271 Emergency start 188 failure 73
Dimensions 231 Emergency starting with auxiliary First aid kit 217
Direction indicator side lights 198 battery 153 Fitting child seats type 1 35
Direction indicators 129 Emergency starting 110 Fitting child vehicle seats
Display (3) 76 Engine and transmission 166 for groups 0 and 0+ 35
Door lock ECU initialisation 103 Engine compartment fuses 205 Flashing the headlights 129
Door open indicator 103 Engine compartment lid 106 Fog lights 69
Door release in the event of an Engine compartment relay 205 “Follow me home” function 130
accident 102 Engine compartment 253 Front airbags 37
Doors and lids open 73 Engine control system (EOBD) 167 Front and rear dome light 200
Doors open warning lights 101 Engine coolant 244 Front and rear lateral airbags 40
Doors 100 Engine diagnosis system failure Front and side airbags 36
Driving at night 177 (EOBD) (*) 69 Front ashtray and cigarette lighter 90
Driving conditions 175 Engine marking 16 Front automatic heating/air
Driving in fog 177 Engine oil 220 conditioning controls (A) 143
Driving in the mountains 178 Engine oil 243 Front dome light 88
Driving in the rain 177 Engine 225 Front seats 117
Driving on snow or ice 178 EPB automatic operation disabled 74 Fuel consumption following
Duplicating the keys 110 Excessive coolant temperature 73 the 2004/3/EC directive
Dust/pollen filter 246 External lights and direction (litres per 100 km) 223
indicators 127 Fuel consumption 223
9 E External rear-view mirrors 124 Fuel cut-out inertia switch 58
Fuel level gauge (1) 75
Easy entry/exit system 120 Fuel tank flap emergency
Easy entry/exit system 126 opening 108
Electric parking brake 181 Fuel tank flap 108
266 Table of contents

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 267 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Fuel 220 H Increasing the speed stored


Fuse colours 203 in the memory 169
Fuses and relays in the engine Handbrake engaged (*) 71 Indicators and warning lights 69
compartment 204 Handholds 93 Inertia switch, fuel
Fuses and relays in the passenger Headlight clusters 197 cut-out enabled 72
compartment, to the left of the Headlight washers 131 Injection – Ignition 225
steering wheel 208 Headlights 174 Instrument panel 68
Fuses inside the luggage Headrest 119 Instruments and gauges 75
compartment 212 Headrests 123 Interiors 254
Fuses inside the passenger Height adjustment 117 Internal outfits 87
compartment, to the left of the High beams 129 Introduction 7
steering wheel 209 High beams 69 Isofix seats 33
Historical info 4
G HomeLink (optional) 94
K
How to keep seat belts efficient 26
Gearbox oil 244 How to use the tyres 249 Key codes 18
Gearshift levers on the steering Keys 109
wheel (optional) 164 I
General warnings for using
the seat belts 25 Ice hazard 74 L
General warnings 41 Identification plates 16 Leather upholstery treatment 254
General 145 If a fuse blows 203 Left-hand direction indicators 71
General 168 If a tyre gets a puncture 190 Level checks 242
Getting into the vehicle when If an interior light goes out 200
the alarm system is on 114 Light switch 127
If an exterior light goes out 197 Lights failure 72
Glove box 92 If the battery is flat 214
Glove compartment 91 Load limiting devices 24
If the vehicle is laid up for long Low brake fluid warning light (*) 70
Glove compartment, glove box
periods 255 Low engine oil level 73
and luggage compartment light 201
If there are injured persons 217 "Low grip" function 74
Group 1 30
If you have to jack up the vehicle 215
Group 2 31
If you have to tow the vehicle 216
Low oil pressure (*)
Low pressure
70
49
9
Group 3 31
Groups 0 and 0+ 30 Ignition switch 112 Lubrication system 226
In the event of an accident 217 Luggage compartment 107
Lumbar support adjustment 117

Table of contents 267

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 268 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

M Ordering extra radio operated R


controls 115
Main operations to be carried Other advices 180 Radio 138
out at the indicated mileage 238 Other system functions 159 Rain sensor failure 73
Malfunction indication 162 Rain sensor 132
Map pockets 92 P Rear ashtray 91
Maserati CODE (*) 71 Rear automatic heating/air
Maserati Multi Media System 133 Paint identification plate 16 conditioning controls (B)
Maxi Fuse colours 203 Parking brake failure (*) 71 (optional) 144
Ministerial homologation 115 Parking lights 127 Rear control panel 147
MSP system failure (*) 71 Parking lights 69 Rear dome light 88
MSP System 43 Parking sensors failure 73 Rear door internal locking device
MSR function (engine braking Parking sensors 54 (child safety device) 101
torque adjustment) 44 Parking 181 Rear door sunshades (optional) 90
Multi Media System configuration Parts in premium quality wood 254 Rear fog lights 69
menu 80 Passenger’s airbag Rear seat adjustments (optional) 121
Multi Media System 8 (full size airbag) 38 Rear seats 121
Passenger’s airbag deactivated 71 Rear window sunshade 89
Rear-view mirrors 124
N Passenger’s Airbag manual
Recharging the battery 214
deactivation switch
Navigator 140 (where available) 39 Reducing the speed stored
Normal conditions 49 Performance 230 in the memory 170
Number plate lights failure 72 Position lights/low beams 69 Refitting the standard wheel 196
Number plate lights 199 Position of fuses/relays 203 Relay/fuse boxes inside
Power steering failure 72 the luggage compartment 211
Power steering fluid 245 Relays in the passenger
O Power windows 104 compartment, to the left of the
Precautions in the event of steering wheel 209
On-board TRIP computer 139
a puncture 190 Relays inside the luggage
Opening doors from the outside 100
Pretensioners 24 compartment 212
Opening from the inside 101
9 Operation in manual and Protection from atmospheric Replacing radio operated
agents 252 control batteries 116
automatic modes 104
Push start 163 Replacing the fuses 203
Operation 109
Replacing the windscreen
wiper blades 251
268 Table of contents

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 269 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Resetting the speed stored operation (MANUAL) 158 System not calibrated 52
in the memory 170 Service 8 System temporarily not active 53
Resetting the switch 58 Settings 172
Restarting the vehicle 255 Shock absorber failure 73 T
Restoring the speed stored Side buttons on the Multi
in the memory 169 Media System display 84 Table of contents 260
Rev. Counter (4) 75 Snow chains 185 Tables (optional) 93
RF remote control: Ministerial Spare wheel (emergency wheel - Tachometer (2) 75
homologation 256 optional) 192 Taillight clusters 197
Right-hand direction indicators 71 Spark plugs 248 Technical specifications 225
Roof controls 86 Speed-sensitive steering wheel 227 The Maserati CODE system 109
RPM indicator screen page 80 Spray nozzles 251 Third stop light 199
“Run Flat” tyre puncture 50 Starting the engine 152 Toolkit 189
“Run Flat” tyres (optional) 9 Starting with the auxiliary Towing the vehicle 163
battery 214 Towing the vehicle 9
S Starting-off when the engine Transmission 226
is cool 152 Travelling 176
Safe driving 175 Steering wheel 126 TRIP screen page 78
Safe transport of children 27 Stop & Go function 55 Turning off the engine 153
Scheduled Maintenance Stop lights failure 72 Twilight sensor failure 72
Services 236 Storing a speed 169 Twilight sensor 128
Scheduled maintenance 74 Storing the seats' and external Tyre inflation pressure when cold 184
Seat belts 22 rear-view mirrors' positions 119 Tyre pressure (*) 70
Seat belts (*) 70 Suitability of the passenger seats Tyre pressure monitoring system
Seat heating 74 for using child seats 32 (optional) 47
Seat inclination adjustment Sun visors 89 Tyre pressure monitoring
(tilting) 117 Sunroof (optional) 87 system failure 52
Seat massage 74 Suspension 227 Tyre pressure screen page 78
Seat ventilation 74 Symbols indicating compulsory Tyre pressure 232
Seatback rake adjustment 117 measures 11 Tyre punctures 50
Self-adaptive seats 74 Symbols of prohibitions 10 Tyres 184 9
Self-diagnosis 171 Symbols 10
Sensor failure 132 System calibration 47
Sensor range 56 System initialisation 147
+ / - – Sequential manual System not active 53
Table of contents 269

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 270 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

U light washers 131


Windscreen wipers 131
Underdoor courtesy light 103 Windscreen wipers 251
Updating 7 Windscreen/headlight washer
USB Socket 139 fluid 244
Use of the engine 166 Winter Pack (optional) 118
Useful accessories to keep Winter Pack (optional) 123
on-board 185 Winter tyres 184
Useful advices for extending
the life of the battery 247 X
Using the brakes 165
Using the jack 215 Xenon headlights 174
Using the rear seat belts 23

V
Vehicle “SPORT” setting 74
Vehicle identification plate 17
Vehicle protection systems 73
Viewing messages on the display 48

W
WARNING - Air filter 241
WARNING - Engine oil 241
Warning lights on the display 72
Warning symbols 11
Weights 230
Wheels and tyres 249
9 Wheels 228
While driving 166
Windscreen washer fluid 72
Windscreen washer 131
Windscreen wiper/washer and head-

270 Table of contents

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


M139_UM_ing.book Page 271 Friday, September 5, 2008 8:19 AM

Details to be recorded

Owner Number plate

Registration no.

Address Engine identification no.

Paint identification no.

Code number of spare parts

Table of contents 271

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


Cap9_ing.fm Page 272 Wednesday, September 24, 2008 3:50 PM

Because of the evolutions of the MASERATI products, which are


continually developed and perfected, MASERATI S.p.A. reserves
the right to make modifications to this manual as well as to the
technical contents, functions and equipment of the vehicles
delivered.

Therefore, the user is not entitled to any claims based on the


contents (texts, data, illustrations, explanations and regulations)
in this manual, which are based on the data known at the time of
going to print.

Publication no. 81551300 - 3rd Edition - 09/2008


This document may not be reproduced, printed or translated,
even partially, without the written consent of MASERATI S.p.A.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

You might also like